Denon AVR-3808CI User Manual

Page 1
AV SURROUND RECEIVER
AVR-3808CI
Owner’s Manual
GraphicalUserInterface
Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen.
GUI Menu Operation (vpage 23) GUI Menu Map (vpage 24)
Page 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
FIGURE A
EXAMPL E OF ANTENN A GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTR ICAL CODE
"/5&//"
-&"%*/ 8*3&
(306/% $-".1
&-&$53* $ 4&37*$& &26*1.& /5
"/5&//" %*4$)"3 (&6/*5 /&$4&$5 *0/ 
(306/%* /($0/%6$ 5034 /&$4&$5 *0/ 
(306/%$- ".14
108&34&3 7*$&(306 /%*/( &-&$530 %&4:45&. /&$"35 1"35)
/&$/"5*0 /"-&-&$5 3*$"-$0% &
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
I
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9. A product and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.
10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.
16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
20. Ser vicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to
restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this
indicates a need for service.
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the
service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,
ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or
ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
25. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Page 3
FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV Surround Receiver Model Number: AVR-3808CI
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC (a D & M Holdings Company)
100 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 Tel. (800) 497-8921
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
3. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.
• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
• Avoid high temperatures. Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.
• Eviter des températures élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur
suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes.
• Handle the power cord carefully. Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du
cordon.
* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre.
II
Page 4
Contents
Getting Started Accessories ······················································································2
Cautions on Handling ····································································· 3 Cautions on Installation ·································································3 About the Remote Control Unit ····················································3
Inserting the Batteries ····································································3 Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit ································ 3
Part Names and Functions ·····························································4
Front Panel ····················································································· 4 Display ···························································································4 Rear Panel ······················································································5 Remote Control Unit ······································································ 6
Connections Preparations ····················································································7
Cables Used for Connections ························································7 Video Conversion Function ····························································· 8
Speaker Connections ·····································································9
Speaker Installation ········································································9 Speaker Connections ······························································· 9, 10
Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors ························· 11 Connecting the Monitor ······························································· 12 Connecting the Playback Components ······································ 12
DVD Player ··················································································· 12 Record Player ··············································································· 13 CD Player ····················································································· 13 iPod® ···························································································· 13 TV/CABLE Tuner ··········································································· 14 Satellite Receiver ········································································· 14
Connecting the Recording Components ···································· 15
Digital Video Recorder ·································································· 15 Video Cassette Recorder ····························································· 15 CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck ····································· 16
Connections to Other Devices ····················································· 16
Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector ·············· 16 Video Camera / Game Console ···················································· 17 Component with Multi-channel Output connectors ····················· 17 External Power Amplifier ······························································ 17 USB Port ······················································································ 18 XM connector ··············································································18 Antenna terminals ······································································· 19 Network Audio ············································································· 20 Multi Zone ····················································································21 External Controller ·······································································21
Connecting the Power Cord·························································22 Once Connections are Completed ··············································22
GUI Menu Operations Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title·····················23
Example of Display of Default Values ········································· 23 Examples of GUI Screen Displays ···············································23
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)············································ 23 Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup) ·························· 23 Cursor Position Display ································································ 23
Operations ····················································································· 23 GUI Menu Map ·············································································· 24
Auto Setup Preparations ··················································································25
Auto Setup ····················································································26
a Auto Setup ·············································································· 26 Error Messages ······································································· 27 s
Option ····················································································· 27
d
Parameter Check ·····································································27
Manual Setup Speaker Setup···············································································28
a
Speaker Configuration ····························································· 28
s
Subwoofer Mode ···································································· 28
d
Distance ·················································································· 28
f
Channel Level··········································································29
g
Crossover Frequency ······························································29
h
Surround Speaker ···································································29
HDMI Setup ···················································································30
a
i/p Scaler ·················································································30
s
Resolution ···············································································30
d
Progressive Mode ···································································30
f
Aspect ·····················································································30
g
Color Space ·············································································30
h
RGB Range ·············································································30
j
Auto Lip Sync ··········································································30
k
Audio ·······················································································30
Audio Setup ··················································································30
a
EXT. IN Setup ··········································································
s
2ch Direct/Stereo ····································································
d
Downmix Option ·····································································
f
Auto Surround Mode ······························································
g
Manual EQ ·············································································· 31
Network Setup ··············································································31
a
Network Setup ········································································32
s
Other ·······················································································32
d
Network Information ·······························································32
Zone Setup ····················································································33
a
ZONE2 ····················································································33
s
ZONE3 ····················································································33
Option Setup ················································································· 33
a
Amp Assign ·············································································
s
Volume Control ·······································································
30 31 31 31
33 34
d
Source Delete ·········································································
f
GUI ··························································································
g
Quick Select Name ·································································
h
Trigger Out 1 ··········································································· 35
j
Trigger Out 2 ··········································································· 35
k
Remote ID ··············································································· 35
l
2Way Remote ········································································· 35
A0
Dimmer ··················································································· 35
A1
Setup Lock ··············································································35
A2
Maintenance Mode ·································································35
A3
Firmware Update ···································································· 36
Language ·······················································································36
Source Select Input Source Selection ··························································· 36, 37
Settings Related to Playing Input Sources ································· 37
a
Play ·························································································
s
Auto Preset ·············································································
d
Preset Skip ··············································································
f
Preset Name ···········································································
g
Input Mode ········································································37, 38
h
Rename ··················································································· 38
j
Other ·······················································································38
k
Playback Mode (iPod) ······························································38
l
Assign ····················································································· 39
A0
Playback Mode ········································································ 39
A1
Antenna Aiming ······································································40
Surround Modes Standard Playback ········································································ 40
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources ·····································40 Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) ·············40
DSP Simulation Playback·····························································41 Stereo Playback ············································································41 Direct Playback ·············································································41
Playback in the Pure Direct Mode ················································ 41
Parameter Audio······························································································41
a
Surround Parameters ······················································41 ~ 43
s
Tone ························································································43
d
Room EQ ················································································43
f
RESTORER ··············································································43
g
Night Mode ············································································· 44
h
Audio Delay ·············································································44
Picture Adjust ················································································ 44
a
Contrast ··················································································44
s
Brightness ···············································································44
d
Chroma Level ··········································································44
f
Hue ·························································································44
34 34 34
37 37 37 37
Page 5
r t u
Q1
o
Q0
Information Status ····························································································44
a
MAIN ZONE ············································································ 44
s
ZONE2/3 ·················································································44
Audio Input Signal ········································································ 45 HDMI Information ·········································································45
a
Signal Information ··································································· 45
s
Monitor ···················································································45
Auto Surround ·············································································· Quick Select ·················································································· Preset Station ···············································································
Playback Preparations ··················································································46
Turning the Power On ··································································46 Operations During Playback ·························································46
Playing Video and Audio Equipment ···········································46 Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts ·················································47
Basic Operation ············································································ 47 Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) ································· 47 Listening to Preset Stations ·························································48
Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs ·································48
Basic Operation ············································································ 48 Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID ··························· 49 Searching Categories ··································································· 49 Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly ·········································49
iPod® Playback ············································································· 50
Basic Operation ············································································ 50 Listening to Music ·······································································50 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod ································· 50
Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices ······················51
Basic Operation ············································································ 52 Listening to Internet Radio ····················································· 52, 53 Presetting Internet Radio Stations ··············································· 53 Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites ··················53 Playing Files Stored on a Computer ·············································54 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices ···························· 54 Operating the AVR-3808CI Using a Browser (Web control) ·········55
45 45 45
Other Operations and Functions Other Operations ··········································································55
Playing Super Audio CDs ·····························································55 Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode) ·····················56
Convenient Functions ··································································56
Channel Level ···············································································56 Fader Function ·············································································56 Quick Select Function ··································································57 Personal Memory Plus Function ·················································· 57 Last Function Memory ·································································57 Backup Memory ··········································································· 57 Resetting the Microprocessor ······················································58
Remote Control Unit Operations Main Remote Control Unit···························································59
Operating DENON Audio Components ········································ 59 Presetting ····················································································· 59 Operating Preset Components ············································59 ~ 61 Setting the Remote ID ································································· 62 Learning Function ·········································································62 System Call Function ···································································· 63 Punch Through Function ·······························································63 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit ······································· 63 Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness ············································64 Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit ·····································64
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations ··································65, 66
Switching Zones ···········································································67 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode) ······················································· 67 Setting the Remote ID ································································· 67 Resetting the Settings ·································································· 67
Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function ···········68, 69
Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output ···70 Multi-Zone Operations ·································································71
Turning the Power On and Off······················································71 Selecting the Input Source ··························································· 71 Adjusting the Volume ··································································· 71 Turning off the Sound Temporarily ················································71
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started
Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product. After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q Owner’s manual ...................................................................... 1
w Warranty (for North America model only) ................................ 1
e Service station list ...................................................................1
r Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 5 ft /1.5 m) .......................... 1
t Main remote control (RC-1068) ............................................... 1
y LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1068) ................................................ 2
u Sub remote control (RC-1070) ................................................. 1
i R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070) .............................................2
o FM indoor antenna ..................................................................1
Q0 AM loop antenna ..................................................................... 1
Q1 Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 25 ft / 7.6 m) ............ 1
Other Information ································································ 72 ~ 81
Troubleshooting ···································································82 ~ 85
Specifications ··············································································· 86
List of preset codes ··········································· End of this manual
Page 6
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Cautions on Handling
• Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
• About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit.
• Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move
the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
• Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before
moving the unit.
Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes.
About the Remote Control Unit
In addition to the AVR-3808CI, the included main remote control unit (RC-1068) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.
q DENON system components w Non-DENON system components
By setting the preset memory (vpage 59 ~ 61)
By using the learn function (vpage 62)
Inserting the Batteries
q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.
(RC-1068) (RC-1070)
w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the
battery compartment.
(RC-1068) (RC-1070)
R03/AAA
LR6/AA
NOTE
• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.
• The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.
• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment.
• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
• Do not use two different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.
• When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible.
Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
Cautions on Installation
Note: For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
b Note
b
b
b
Wall
e Put the rear cover back on.
(RC-1070)
30°
30°
or
Approx. 23 feet / 7 m
(RC-1068)
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light.
Page 7
w e
to i u y
q r
Q3Q2Q1Q0
t
yQ6Q7 uo
iQ4 Q0
Q1Q2Q3Q5
wq e r
Part Names and Functions
W3W4W5W7W8W9E0E1E2E3 W6
Q4 Q5 Q6 Q8 W1W0Q7 W2Q9
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Front Panel
W6 USB port ······················································ (18) W7 STATUS button ···········································(45) W8 AUDIO DELAY button ································· (44) W9 RESTORER button ······································ (43)
Display
E0 DIRECT/STEREO button·····························(41) E1 PURE DIRECT button ·································· (41) E2 DSP SIMULATION button ·························· (41) E3 STANDARD button ·····································(40)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
GWith the door openG
q Power operation button
(ON/STANDBY) ···········································(46)
w Power indicator ··········································· (46) e Power switch (hON jOFF) ····················· (46) r QUICK SELECT buttons / indicators ········· (57) t MASTER VOLUME control knob ················ (46) y Master volume indicator u Display
i Remote control sensor ································· (3) o SOURCE SELECT knob······························· (36) Q0 SOURCE button ·········································· (36) Q1 TUNING PRESET button ···························· (48) Q2 ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT button ··········(56, 71) Q3 VIDEO SELECT button ·······························(38) Q4 Headphones jack (PHONES) ······················ (46) Q5 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (71) Q6 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (71) Q7 INPUT MODE button ·································· (38) Q8 MENU button ·············································· (23) Q9 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·························· (23) W0 CH SEL / ENTER button ······················· (23, 56) W1 RETURN button ·········································· (23) W2 V.AUX INPUT connectors ··························· (17) W3 SETUP MIC jack ·········································· (25) W4 ROOM EQ button ········································ (43) W5 DIMMER button ·········································· (35)
q Input signal indicators w Input signal channel indicators
These light when digital signals are input.
e Information display
The input source name, surround mode, setting
values and other information are displayed here.
r Output signal channel indicators t Surround speaker indicators
These light according to the settings of the
surround A and B speakers.
y Master volume indicator u AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator
This lights when the room equalizer is selected.
i Recording output source indicator
This lights when the REC OUT mode is
selected.
o NIGHT indicator
This lights when the night mode is selected.
Q0 Multi zone indicators
These light when the power for the respective
zone is turned on.
Q1 RESTORER indicator
This lights when the RESTORER mode is
selected.
Q2 AL24 indicator
This lights when AL24 Processing Plus is
activated (vpage 74).
Q3 D.LINK indicator
This lights when playing using DENON LINK
connections.
Q4 Input mode indicators Q5 HDMI indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI
connections.
Q6 Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are
operating.
Q7 Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions
when the input source is set to “TUNER”.
AUTO
These light when in the auto tuning mode.
STEREO
In the FM mode, these light when receiving analog stereo broadcasts.
TUNED
Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
Page 8
Q7 Q8 Q8Q9 Q7 W0
y
r
Q0Q1Q2Q3
Q6
oQ4Q5
q w e iu
t
Q7 Q8 Q8Q9 Q7 W0
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Rear Panel
q RS-232C connector ····································· (21) w REMOTE CONTROL jacks···························(21) e TRIGGER OUT jacks ···································(21) r FM/AM antenna terminals
(TUNER ANTENNA) ···································· (19)
t DOCK CONTROL jack ································· (13) y Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) ·················· (9) u AC OUTLETS ··············································· (22)
i AC inlet (AC IN) ··········································· (22) o Digital audio connectors
(OPTICAL / COAXIAL) ·························· (12, 14)
Q0 ETHERNET connector ································· (20) Q1 USB port ······················································ (18) Q2 XM connector (SAT TU) ······························ (18) Q3 DENON LINK connector ····························· (16) Q4 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ·············· (12)
Q5 HDMI connectors ·········································(11) Q6 VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors ···················· (12) Q7 Analog audio connectors (AUDIO) ············ (12) Q8 PRE OUT connectors ····························· (17, 21) Q9 EXT. IN connectors ····································· (17) W0 SIGNAL GND terminal ······························· (13)
Page 9
q
i
w
e
r
t y u
o
Q1
Q3
Q4
Q2
Q0
Q5
Q6 Q7
Q9
W0
W2
W5
W7
W6
W4
W3
W1
Q8
q
r
t y
i
o
Q0
u
e
w
Q4
Q7
Q8
Q6
Q5
Q2
Q3
Q1
Q9
W0
Remote Control Unit
n Main remote control unit (RC-1068) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)
q Signal transmission indicator ···················(59) w Mode select buttons ··································(59) e Quick select / System call buttons ······(57, 63) r Surround mode buttons ······················ (40, 41) t System buttons ···································· (60, 61) y Audio delay button (A. DL) ························(44) u Tuner system buttons ································ (47) i Input mode button (INPUT) ······················· (38) o MENU button ·············································· (23) Q0 Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (23) Q1 Parameter / Search button
(PARA / SRCH) ································ (41, 49, 50)
Q2 HOME button ·············································· (59) Q3 Channel buttons (CH) ································· (47) Q4 Input source select / Number buttons ·· (36, 47) Q5 Remote control signal transmitter ·············· (3) Q6 Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2) ···(59) Q7 ZONE3 select indicators (Z3) ····················· (71) Q8 RESTORER button (RSTR) ·························· (43) Q9 Night button (NGT) ···································· (44) W0 Test tone button (TEST) ····························· (29) W1 Surround speaker select button (SPKR) ··· (29) W2 POWER buttons ·········································· (46) W3 Channel select (CH SEL) /
ENTER button ······································· (23, 56)
W4 Return button (RTN) ··································· (23) W5 Master volume control buttons (VOL) ······(46) W6 Muting button (MUTE) ························· (46, 71) W7 Main remote control unit setup button
(RC SETUP) ················································· (59)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
q ZONE indicators·········································· (67) w Advanced setup button ······························ (67) e Input source select buttons ······················· (36) r CHANNEL buttons ······································ (47) t SHIFT button ··············································· (47) y MENU button ·············································· (23) u Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (23) i SEARCH button ····································(49, 50) o REPEAT button ············································ (50) Q0 RANDOM button ········································(50) Q1 Remote control signal transmitter ·············· (3) Q2 ZONE SELECT button ································· (67) Q3 Zone power on/off buttons
(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF) ····························· (71)
Q4 Master volume control buttons
(VOLUME) ············································(65, 66)
Q5 Muting button (MUTE) ························· (46, 71) Q6 ENTER button ············································· (23) Q7 RETURN button ·········································· (23) Q8 System buttons ····································· (47, 65) Q9 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES
(DIRECT PLAY) button ······························· (65)
W0 USB (DIRECT PLAY) button························ (65)
NOTE
The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3, DTU, DVR-2 and OPTION buttons cannot be used.
The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed (vpage 63 “Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit”).
NOTE
• The M. SEL, DTU buttons cannot be used.
• The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A.DL,
RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround
mode buttons cannot be used.
• The ZONE4 mode cannot be used.
Page 10
R
L
R
L
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Preparations
Connections
Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in these operating instructions. Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting. With some types of connections, certain settings must be made on the AVR-3808CI. For details, refer to the instructions for the respective connection items below.
NOTE
• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.
Cables Used for Connections
Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.
Audio cables Video cables
Coaxial digital connections
(Orange)
Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable
Optical digital connections
Optical cable
Analog connections (stereo)
(White)
(Red)
Stereo pin-plug cable
Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)
(Black)
Pin-plug cable
DENON LINK connections
DENON LINK cable
Component video connections
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
S-Video connections
Video connections
(Yellow)
Component video cable
S-Video cable
75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable
Audio and video cables
HDMI connections
19-pin HDMI cable
(Y)
(PB/CB)
(PR/CR)
Speaker connections
Audio signal: Video signal:
Output
Input
Speaker cables
Network connections
Ethernet cable
Signal direction
Input
Output
Output
Input
Input
Output
Page 11
Video Conversion Function
• This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-3808CI into the format used to output the video signals from the AVR-3808CI to a monitor.
• The AVR-3808CI’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals: Digital video signals: HDMI Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video
GFlow of video signals inside the AVR-3808CIG
Main zone
High picture
quality playback
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
• When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video input connector.
• The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVR-3808CI can be checked at GUI menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor” (vpage 45).
NOTE
• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
• 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video connectors.
• 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video format.
• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.
ZONE2
High picture
quality playback
Component video
connectors
S-Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs Video outputs
: When 480i/576i signals are input in the main zone
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2G
S-Video connector
Video connector Video connector
Video inputs Video outputs
Component video
connectors
S-Video connector
Video connector
Monitor
ZONE2
monitor
Page 12
w q
w q
w q w q w q w q w q w q
*/
w q
(R)
(L) (R) (L) (R)
(L)
(L) (R)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Speaker Connections
Speaker Installation
The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and a monitor.
Subwoofer Center speaker
Surround back speakers
Front speakers
Place the front speakers to the sides of the monitor or screen and as flush with the screen surface as possible.
The table below shows a typical speaker configuration for the AVR-3808CI.
7.1-channels
(Surround A+B)
7.1-channels
6.1-channels
5.1-channels
3.1-channels
2.1-channels 2-channels
Front
L R L R L R L R
S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Center
Surround A Surround B Surround back
– – – –
Surround speakers
only
– – – –
S S
1
S S
Subwoofer
S
S
S S S
Speaker Connections
Example: 5.1-channels (Surround A+B) and ZONE2 use
Front speakers Center speaker Subwoofer
Subwoofer with built-in amplifier
b L : Left R : Right
Surround speakers
A
When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).
Surround speakers
B
NOTE
By default, the AVR-3808CI’s “Amp Assign” setting is set to “ZONE2”. To use as the surround back speaker for the main zone, change the “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 68, 69).
ZONE2 speakers
ZONE2
Page 13
Connecting the Speaker Cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-3808CI, and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly.
Peel off about 0.03 ft/10 mm of sheathing
1
from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.
Turn the speaker terminal
2
counterclockwise to loosen it.
Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to
3
the hilt into the speaker terminal.
Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to
4
tighten it.
When using a banana plug
Tighten the speaker terminal firmly before inserting the banana plug.
Protection circuit
If speakers with an impedance lower than specified (for example 4 Ω/ohms speakers) are used for an extended period of time with the volume turned up high, the temperature may rise, activating the protection circuit. When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is shut off and the power indicator flashes red. If this happens, unplug the power cord, then check the speaker cable and input cable connections. If the set is extremely hot, wait for it to cool off and improve ventilation around it. Once this is done, plug the power cord back in and turn the set's power back on. If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections, the set may be damaged. Turn the power off, then contact a DENON service center.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 Ω/ohms. When using surround A and B speakers simultaneously, use speakers with an impedance of 8 to 16 Ω/ohms.
• Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out of the speaker terminals. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each other (v “Protection circuit”).
• Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock.
0
Page 14
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
065
)%.*
*/
)%.*
Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors
With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
MonitorDVD player
b The AVR-3808CI is equipped for HDMI version 1.3a.
This version is compatible with other versions, allowing connection to all components equipped with an HDMI connector.
b The AVR-3808CI is compatible with 30- and 36-bit Deep
Color.
Compatible
audio format
2-channel linear PCM
Multi-channel linear PCM
Dolby Digital, DTS Bitstream DVD-Video
DSD
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Details
2ch 32-192 kHz 16/20/24 bits
8ch 32-192 kHz 16/20/24 bits
2/5.1ch
2.8224 MHz 1 bit
Bitstream
Copyright protection system (HDCP)
In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD­Video or DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection system called “HDCP” (High­bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identification of the devices. The AVR-3808CI is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions.
Discs
(examples)
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio
SACD
HD DVD, Blu-ray Disc
NOTE
• Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM.
• The AVR-3808CI cannot be controlled from another device via the HDMI cable.
• The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted by the connected device.
• Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP-compatible.
• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
• If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting (vpage 30) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off.
• Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product).
• If the monitor or DVD player does not support deep color, deep color signal transfer is not possible.
• If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC signal transfer is not possible.
• If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction” function, this function will not work.
• When the AVR-3808CI and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-3808CI and monitor using an HDMI cable.
• If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. When using a DVI cable, no audio signals are transmitted.
• Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices.
When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable (adapter)
• HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format. When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D connector, connection is possible using an
HDMI/DVI converter cable, but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video signals will not be output.
• When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with the connected cable, etc.
• By default, the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVR-3808CI.
• To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup”
– “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 30).

Page 15
Connecting the Monitor
47*%&0
*/
7*%&0
$0.10/&/57*%&0
: 1# 13
7*%&0
*/
)%.*
*/ */
47*%&0
065
"6%*07*%&0
$0.10/&/57*%&0
: 1# 13
7*%&0
065 065
"6%*0
$0"9*"-
065
3-
065065
)%.*
R
L
R
L
• Connect the cables to be used (vpage 8 “Video Conversion Function”).
• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
• To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections, set GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV” (vpage 30).
Monitor
Connecting the Playback Components
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
DVD Player
• Connect the cables to be used.
• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
DVD player
NOTE
• The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor. For details, see the monitor’s operating instructions.
• The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.
• Connect an HDP (High-Definition Player) in the same way.
• When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).

Page 16
Record Player
(/%
"6%*0
065
R
L
"6%*0
"6%*0
$0"9*"-
065
3-
065
R
L
R
L
"4%3
R
L
R
L
CD Player
iPod
®
ConnectionsGetting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Turntable (MM cartridge)
Connect the cables to be used.
CD player
or
Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to connect the iPod to the AVR-3808CI. For instructions on the Control Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.
Example :
iPod
• When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amplifier or a step-up transformer.
• Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the
• With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground
speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.
wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.
NOTE
The AVR-3808CI’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground terminal.

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).
• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which iPod dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 39).
Page 17
47*%&0
065
"6%*07*%&0
$0.10/&/57*%&0
: 1# 13
7*%&0
065 065
"6%*0
3-
065
$0"9*"-
065
R
L
R
L
TV/CABLE Tuner
47*%&0
065
"6%*07*%&0
$0.10/&/57*%&0
: 1# 13
7*%&0
065 065 065
015*$"-"6%*0
3-
065
R
L
R
L
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Satellite Receiver
Connect the cables to be used.
TV tuner
Connect the cables to be used.
DBS / BS tuner
When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).
• When using a coaxial digital cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 39).
• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).

Page 18
47*%&0
*/
3- 3-
*/*/065
"6%*07*%&0
*/065
015*$"-
065
"6%*07*%&0
065
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
47*%&0
*/
3- 3-
*/*/065
"6%*07*%&0
065
"6%*07*%&0
065 */065
015*$"-
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
Connecting the Recording Components
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
Digital Video Recorder
Connect the cables to be used.
Digital video recorder
Video Cassette Recorder
Connect the cables to be used.
Video cassette recorder
or or
• Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals.
• When recording to a digital video recorder, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-3808CI DVR OUT connector. Example: TV IN S-Video cable : DVR OUT S-Video cable TV IN Video cable : DVR OUT Video cable
• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808CI’s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL2.
or
or
• When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-3808CI VCR OUT connector. Example: TV IN S-Video cable : VCR OUT S-Video cable TV IN Video cable : VCR OUT Video cable
• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 39).
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808CI’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.

Page 19
3- 3-
065 */065
015*$"-
*/
"6%*0
"6%*0
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck
%&/0/-*/,
"6%*0
Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.
CD recorder / MD recorder / Tape deck
or
Connections to Other Devices
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector
Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CD, etc.
DVD player
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-3808CI’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.
To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “Assign” – “Digital” – “DENON LINK” (vpage 39).

Page 20
47*%&0
065
"6%*07*%&0
7*%&0
065 065
015*$"-"6%*0
3-
065
R
L
R
L
46#
800'&3
$&/5&3 463306/%
#"$,
3-
463306/%
3-
'30/5
3-
"6%*0
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
46#
800'&3
$&/5&3 463306/%
#"$,
3-
463306/%
3-
'30/5
3-
"6%*0
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
Video Camera / Game Console
Video camera / Game console
Component with Multi-channel Output connectors
DVD player / Super Audio CD player / External decoder
External Power Amplifier
Power amplifier

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left
• To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors,
press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button
channel (SBL).
on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 37).
• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player
(vpage 12).
• To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVR-3808CI’s EXT. IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output connector.
Page 21
XM
USB Port
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
XM connector
n Front panel n Rear panel
USB memory device USB memory device
• In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel.
• To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 39.
• For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device, see page 54.
NOTE
• Set to the USB port you want to use.
• The AVR-3808CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.
• The AVR-3808CI is an XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM® Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (includes home antenna, sold separately) and subscribing to the XM service.
• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on the rear panel.
• Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs” (vpage
48, 49).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
• Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVR-3808CI’s USB port. Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.
NOTE
Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connection have been completed.
• The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
• XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All
rights reserved.

Page 22
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Antenna terminals
An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.
Direction of broadcasting station
FM antenna
75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
AM loop antenna (supplied)
AM loop antenna assembly
Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.
a. With the antenna on top of
any stable surface.
Mount


Ground
Connect to the AM antenna terminals.
Bend in the reverse direction.
b. With the antenna attached
to a wall.
Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.
AM outdoor antenna
Connection of AM antennas
1. Push the lever.
2. Insert the conductor.
NOTE
• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
3. Return the lever.
Page 23
Network Audio
Internet
Router
Modem
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port
Computer
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
Required system
n Broadband Internet connection
A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to use the AVR-3808CI’s Internet radio function and firmware update.
n Modem
This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate with the Internet. Some are integrated with the router.
n Router
When using the AVR-3808CI, we recommend you use a router
equipped with the following functions:
• Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
• Built-in 100 BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
n Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
• The AVR-3808CI does not come with an Ethernet cable.
• Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise. We recommend using a normal type cable.
• If the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network environment, use a shielded type Ethernet cable.
n Computer
A computer with the following specifications is required to use a music server:
• OS
Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista
• Software (Prepare one of the following.)
· .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)
· Windows Media Player ver.11
· DLNA-compatible server software
• Internet browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later
• LAN port
• 300 MB or more free disk space
b Free disk space is required to store music files. The following
sizes are approximate.
Format Bit rate Per minute Per hour
MP3 / WMA
MPEG-4 AAC
WAV (LPCM)
FLAC
128 kbps Approx. 1 MB Approx. 60 MB 192 kbps Approx. 1.5 MB Approx. 90 MB 256 kbps Approx. 2 MB Approx. 120 MB
392 kbps Approx. 3 MB Approx. 180 MB 1400 kbps Approx. 10 MB Approx. 600 MB 1080 kbps Approx. 7.7 MB Approx. 464 MB
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.
NOTE
• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet. No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details.
• Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they cannot be played on the AVR-3808CI.
n Others
• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network
settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32).
• With the AVR-3808CI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP
functions to make the network settings automatically.
• When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVR-3808CI
sets the IP address, etc., automatically.
When using the AVR-3808CI connected to a network with no
DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32).
• The AVR-3808CI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible
router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set.
• Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may
be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the AVR-3808CI in the same way.
0
Page 24
R
L
R
L
"69 065
"6%*0
3-
*/*/
7*%&0
"6%*07*%&0
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Multi Zone
ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections
• If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out (variable or fixed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3 the same time (vpage 68 ~ 71).
• When using an S-Video cable or a video cable for connection between the AVR-3808CI and an input device, connect to the video connectors.
• The ZONE2 video out is only for ZONE2.
Monitor (ZONE2)
Power amplier (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
External Controller
RS-232C connector
This connector is used for an external controller.
b If you wish to control the AVR-3808CI from
an external controller using the RS-232C connector, perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn the AVR-3808CI’s power. w Turn off the AVR-3808CI’s power from the
external controller.
e Check that the AVR-3808CI is in the standby
mode.
• When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF Remote Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible.
The AVR-3808CI’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed
watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.
• When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller or RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 35).
Input
Infrared retransmitter
Output
Infrared sensor
Extension jack for future use.
NOTE
• For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.
• For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’ operating instructions.
• To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 68 ~ 71).

Trigger output jacks
The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVR-3808CI. For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage 35).
• Output level: 150 mA/12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device.
• If the trigger input level of the connected device is higher than 150 mA/12 V and depending on the short-circuiting conditions, the AVR-3808CI’s protection circuit may be activated, in which case “TRIGGER PROTECT” appears on the display. If this happens, turn off the AVR-3808CI’s power and disconnect the connected device.
Page 25
Connecting the Power Cord
Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.
To household
Power cord
(included)
power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Connection to the AC outlets
• These outlets supply power to external audio devices.
• The power supplied from these outlets turns on and off together with the set’s power switch.
• Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 120 W (1 A) can be connected.
NOTE
• Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.
• Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment.
Once Connections are Completed
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Turning the Power On (vpage 46)

Page 26
Auto Setup
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
Some typical examples are described below.
SOURCE SELECT
TUNER PHONO
HDP
DVD
CD
TV/CBL
Select input source and make playback settings
AUTO S ETUP
1 2 3 4 5
Start
RETURN
Amp As sign
STEP1 Speaker Det ection Please place the microphone at ear height at main li stening position.
Start Auto Setup
Enter Cancel
Config 5.1
Selected item
name
List of subsequent items
Guidance text for item at
cursor position
Illustration
Operation
button guidance
Guidance text for item at cursor
position
Operation guidance text
n Icon
n List
Assign
Input Mode Rename Other
Switch the selected item
Selected item
Switch the selected item
Switch to the next item
Selected item
Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)
Examples of GUI Screen Displays
Example: Menus with Illustrations
(Auto Setup)
Cursor Position Display
Operations
The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit.
GUI Menu Operations
With the AVR-3808CI, settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on the monitor screen.
b Switch the selected item using
ui.
1
Press the MENU button.
The GUI menu is displayed.
b To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
2
Press the u i p button to select the menu to be set
or operated.
b To return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.
3
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
4
Press the MENU button to fi nish.
Example of Display of Default Values
[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1
In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item surrounded by a border is the default value.
Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI. We recommend performing such operations from the GUI.
This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to which this item belongs.
Switch to the next item
The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g.VGA) are input.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Operation step indicators
When “Screensaver” is set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if no operation is performed for about 3 minutes.
Page 27
GUI Menu Map
Parameter
(vpage 41 ~ 44)
Information
(vpage 44, 45)
n Status
• MAIN ZONE
• ZONE2/3
n Audio Input Signal n HDMI Information n Auto Surround Mode n Quick Select n Preset Station
n Audio
• Surround Parameters
· Mode
· Cinema EQ
· DRC
· D.COMP
· LFE
· Center Image
· Panorama
· Dimension
· Center Width
· Delay Time
· Effect
· Effect Level
· Room Size
· AFDM
· SB CH Out
· Subwoofer Att.
· Subwoofer
· Default
• Tone
· Tone Defeat
· Bass
· Treble
• Room EQ
• RESTORER
• Night Mode
• Audio Delay
n Picture Adjust
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Chroma Level
• Hue
Manual Setup
(vpage 28 ~ 36)
n
Speaker Setup (vpage 28, 29)
• Speaker Confi guration
• Subwoofer Mode
• Distance
• Channel Level
• Crossover Frequency
• Surround Speaker
n HDMI Setup (vpage 30)
• i/p Scaler
• Resolution
• Progressive Mode
• Aspect
• Color Space
• RGB Range
• Auto Lip Sync
• Audio
n Audio Setup (vpage 30, 31)
• EXT. IN Setup
· Surround Speaker
· Subwoofer Level
• 2ch Direct/Stereo
• Downmix Option
• Auto Surround
• Manual EQ
Auto Setup
(vpage 25 ~ 27)
n Auto Setup
• STEP1: Speaker Detection
• STEP2: Measurement
• STEP3: Calculation
• STEP4: Check
• STEP5: Store
n Option
• Room EQ
• Direct Mode
• Mic Select
n Parameter
• Speaker Confi guration Check
• Distance Check
• Channel Level Check
• Crossover Check
• EQ Check
• Restore
n Network Setup
(vpage 31, 32)
• Network Setup
• Other
· Power Saving
· Character
· PC Language
• Network Information
n Zone Setup (vpage 33)
• ZONE2
· Bass
· Treble
· HPF
· Lch Level
· Rch Level
· Channel
· Volume Level
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
• ZONE3
· Bass
· Treble
· HPF
· Lch Level
· Rch Level
· Channel
· Volume Level
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
n
Option Setup (vpage 33 ~ 36)
• Amp Assign
• Volume Control
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
• Source Delete
• GUI
· Screensaver
· Wall Paper
· Format
· Text
· Master Volume
· NET/USB
· iPod
· Tuner
• Quick Select Name
• Trigger Out 1
• Trigger Out 2
• Remote ID
• 2Way Remote
• Dimmer
• Setup Lock
• Maintenance Mode
• Firmware Update
n Language (vpage 36)
Source Select
(vpage 36 ~ 40)
n TUNER (FM/AM)
• Play
• Auto Preset
• Preset Skip
• Preset Name
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
n PHONO
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
n CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX
• Play (iPod)
• Playback Mode (iPod)
• Assign
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
·
Video Convert (Excluding CDs)
· Source Level
n NET/USB
• Play
• Playback Mode
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
n XM
• Play
• Preset Skip
• Antenna Aiming
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
Surround Mode
(vpage 40, 41)
n STEREO n DIRECT n STANDARD n DOLBY PLIIx, DOLBY PLII or
DOLBY PL
n DTS NEO:6 n neural n 7CH STEREO n WIDE SCREEN n SUPER STADIUM n ROCK ARENA n JAZZ CLUB n CLASSIC CONCERT n MONO MOVIE n VIDEO GAME n MATRIX n VIRTUAL

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 28

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
• Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio experience for your home theater.
• It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are seated.
Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone
(DM-A405) successively at multiple positions throughout the listening area as shown in Example q. For best results, it is strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the measurements have the proper spatial weighting.
Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example w,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction.
Preparations
When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting the auto setup procedure:
• Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible
• If this is not possible then set
Volume: “12 o’clock” position
Crossover frequency: “Maximum/Highest Frequency”
Low pass fi lter: “Off”
Standby mode: “Off”
NOTE
• Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed.
• When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure.
Auto Setup
To make manual adjustments to the settings, see pages 28, 29.
1
Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to
the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.
The auto setup screen appears automatically.
2
Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand
with the microphone pointing directly up towards the ceiling.
b It is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the
path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects. Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound refl ections may give inaccurate results.
Sound receptor
Setup
microphone
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position refers to the most central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
*
M
*
M
Example q Example w
( :Measuring positions)
Page 29

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Auto Setup
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
F Menu tree F
Auto Setup
a Auto Setup
s Option
d Parameter
Start
Start Auto Setup. The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area. Before starting, connect and position all your speakers. Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker.
[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1
a Auto Setup
The settings are performed automatically.
GAuto setup fl owG
STEP1: Speaker Detection
STEP2: Measurement (2 to 8 positions)
STEP3: Calculation
STEP4: Check
STEP5: Store
NOTE
Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored.
STEP2: Measurement
After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to the next position.
Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6
or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions).
STEP3: Calculation
When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the measurements taken are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system interacts with the room.
The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time required for analysis.
STEP4: Check
Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check screen appears. Select any item whose results you want to check to review the results.
Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for speakers with built-in fi lters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because fi lters add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated.
STEP5: Store
The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVR-3808CI.
Confi guration
The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time here.
If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error Messages” (vpage 27), take the advised action, then start the measurements again.
Setting the correct speaker confi guration can reduce the time required to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not have to look for speakers that are not connected.
The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the fi rst measurement position. The following attributes are also determined at this time: “Speaker Size”, “Speaker Distance”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency”. Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed.
STEP1 : Speaker Detection
NOTE
• Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT Automatic Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings.
• Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds.
• Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL +/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
• Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after “STEP1”.
Amp Assign
Advanced setting : changes power amplifi er assignment.
NOTE
The items selectable at “Confi g.” differ according to the “Amp Assign” settings.
NOTE
“Amp Assign” is initially set to “ZONE2”, so “7.1 (B)” and “7.1” cannot be selected. To use “7.1 (B)” or “7.1”, change the “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 68 ~ 70).
Page 30
Error Messages
If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error message is displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over again.
Error messages (examples) Cause Measures
No microphone or speaker • Included setup microphone is not connected.
• Not all speakers could be detected.
• Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC
jack on the main unit.
• Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low
• Too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made.
• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made.
• Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
• Try again when the surroundings are quieter.
• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
None • Displayed speaker could not be detected.
· The front L and front R speakers were not properly detected.
· Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (B) speakers was detected.
· Sound was output from the R channel when only one surround back speaker was connected.
· The surround back or the surround (B) speaker was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was not detected.
• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Phase • Displayed speaker connected with the polarities
reversed.
• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure that the wiring is correct, select “Skip”.
NOTE
Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.
Room EQ
Select room EQ setting method.
s
Option
Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.
[Selectable items] All Assign
Direct Mode
Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
Mic Select
Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic. The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.
[Selectable items] Mic V.AUX L
d
Parameter Check
Check auto setup measurement results. This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed.
Spkr Confi g Check
Distance Check
Ch. Level Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
[Items to be checked]
Select “Retry” to make the measurements again.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by MultEQ XT when “Restore” is selected.
Only a professionally certifi ed installer should ever connect a professionally-calibrated microphone to the V.AUX L input on the front panel.
Page 31
Make detail settings for various parameters.
Speaker Setup
Use this procedure to set the speakers manually or if you wish to change the settings made with the auto setup procedure.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Speaker Setup
a Speaker Confi guration
s Subwoofer Mode
d Distance
f Channel Level
g Crossover Frequency
h Surround Speaker
Manual Setup
Front
Select front speaker size.
a
Speaker Confi guration
Select speaker confi guration and size. (bass reproduction capability)
[Selectable items] Large Small
Center
Select center speaker use and size.
[Selectable items] Large Small None
Subwoofer
Select subwoofer use.
[Selectable items] Yes No
Surround A
Select surround speakers A use and size.
[Selectable items] Large Small None
Surround B
Select surround speakers B use and size.
[Selectable items] Large Small
None
Surround Back
Select surround back speaker use and size.
[Selectable items](Large Small None
)
(
2spkrs 1spkr
)
• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage
29).
• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.
• If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
• If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround Back” are automatically set to “None”.
• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).
s
Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.
[Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main
• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Confi guration” – “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
d
Distance
Set distance from listening position to speakers. Before making the settings, measure the distance from the listening position to the different speakers.
Feet / Meters
Select unit for distance.
Step
Select step. (smallest distance)
[Selectable items]
1ft
/
0.1ft
z1
/
0.1m
/
0.01m
z2
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
Distance measurement
Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance. Set the value closest to the measured distance.
[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
z1 /
0.00m ~ 18.00m
z2
NOTE
Set the distance between the listening position and the various speakers to no more than 20.0 ft (6.00 meters).
z1: Can be selected when “Feet” is set. z2: Can be selected when “Meters” is set.
z1: Display when “Feet” is set. z2: Display when “Meters” is set.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
NOTE
By default, the AVR-3808CI’s “Amp Assign” setting is set to “ZONE2”. To use as the surround back speaker for the main zone, change the “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 68, 69).
Large
: Select this for a large speaker with strong bass
reproduction.
Small
: Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass
reproduction.
Page 32
Surround A Surround B
Surround A+B
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
f
Channel Level
Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers.
Mode
Select test tone playback method.
[Selectable items] Auto Manual
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
g
Crossover Frequency
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.
[Selectable items]
h
Surround Speaker
Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.
[Selectable items]
Operating from the main remote control unit
Press the SPKR button.
A
B A+B
Surround
Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.
[Selectable items] A
B
A+B
Start
Output test tone.
[Variable range]
Operating from the main remote control unit
Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory.
GAdjusting using test tonesG
q Press the TEST button. Test tones are output from the various speakers. w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all
speakers.
e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button
again.
• When the GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back”
setting (vpage 28) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker display is set to “Surround Back”.
• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” settings are not displayed.
• “Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround A” or “Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage
28).
• When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers.
• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 56.
–12dB
~
0dB
~
+12dB
40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz
120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz
Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output. Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using.
Advanced
Set the crossover frequency separately for the different speakers.
• The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers that have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” or when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 28).
• If GUI menu “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 28) is set to “LFE”, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Configuration” can be set. If set to “LFE+Main”, this can be set regardless of the size of the speaker.
• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
• Always set the crossover frequency to “80 Hz”. When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency.
:
• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” - “Surround
A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 28).
• When using the pre-out connectors, select and use either “Surround A” or “Surround B”.
• Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to “EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN Setup” (vpage 30).
About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Surround speakers A and B
If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.

Page 33
a
i/p Scaler
Make settings for i/p scaler function.
[Selectable items] A to H A to H & H to H OFF
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
HDMI Setup
a i/p Scaler
s Resolution
d Progressive Mode
f Aspect
g Color Space
h RGB Range
j Auto Lip Sync
k Audio
s
Resolution
Make settings for resolution of HDMI video output signal.
[Selectable items] Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p
NOTE
• It is not possible to convert “1080i” signals into “720p” format.
• It is not possible to convert “720p” signals into “1080i” format.
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
d
Progressive Mode
Select optimum progressive mode for video material.
[Selectable items]
Auto Video1 Video2
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
f
Aspect
This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or 480p/576p input signals from the HDMI output connector.
[Selectable items] Full Normal
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
g
Color Space
Make settings for output color space.
[Selectable items]
YCbCr RGB
When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output in RGB format, regardless of this setting.
h
RGB Range
Make settings for RGB output range.
[Selectable items] Normal Enhanced
A to H & H to H setting
• Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.
• The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s resolution signals are input.
j
Auto Lip Sync
Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
k
Audio
Select HDMI audio output device.
[Selectable items]
Amp TV
0
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
a
EXT. IN Setup
Make speaker settings for EXT. IN mode playback.
Audio Setup
Make settings for audio playback.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Audio Setup
a EXT.IN Setup
s 2ch Direct/Stereo
d Downmix Option
f Auto Surround Mode
g Manual EQ
Surround Speaker
Select the surround speakers to use.
[Selectable items] A
B
A+B
Subwoofer Level
Set the subwoofer level for playback. Select according to the player in use.
[Selectable items] 0dB +5dB +10dB +15dB
We recommend setting to “+15 dB”.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 34
s
2ch Direct/Stereo
Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.
Setting
To change the settings, select “Custom”.
[Selectable items] Basic
z
Custom
Front
Select front speaker size.
[Selectable items]
Large
Small
Subwoofer
Select subwoofer use.
[Selectable items] Yes No
Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.
[Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main
Crossover
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.
[Selectable items] 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz
110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz
Distance FL
Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.
[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
Distance FR
Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.
[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
d
Downmix Option
Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
• Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems distorted.
• When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.
f
Auto Surround Mode
Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
• The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below.
q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals r Multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM,
DSD, etc.)
• When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
g
Manual EQ
Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer.
Adjust CH
Select speaker adjustment method.
[Selectable items] Each L/R All
Manual EQ
Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.
[Selectable items] 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k
8k 16k
Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve from Room EQ.
[Selectable items] Yes No
“Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been performed.
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
[Variable range] –20dB ~ +6dB
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Network Setup
Make network settings.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Network Setup
Network Setup
Other
Network Information
z: Use the same settings as in “Speaker Setup”.
Page 35
a
Network Setup
Make settings for LAN.
To acquire the IP address automatically
using the DHCP function
To enter the IP address manually
Turn on the AVR-3808CI’s power.
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Detail” setting, set “DHCP” to “OFF” and enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, primary DNS and secondary DNS.
To not pass through the proxy server To connect via proxy server
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Proxy” setting, set “Proxy” to “ON” and enter the address or domain name and port numbers.
This setting is required when the network is established via proxy servers.
Recheck the connections and settings if you cannot connect to the Internet (vpage 20).
This completes the setting.

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
NOTE
Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings. For details, consult a network administrator.
s
Other
Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language environment.
Power Saving
Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
PC Language
Select computer environment language.
[Selectable items] ara chi (smpl) chi (trad) cze dan
dut eng fi n fre ger gre heb
hun ita jpn kor nor pol por
por (BR) rus spa swe
tur
d
Network Information
Display network information.
[Items to be checked] DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address
MAC Address
Character
Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.
[Selectable items] Auto Latin Japanese
If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to “Latin” or “Japanese”.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 36
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Zone Setup
Make settings for audio playback in a multi­zone system.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Zone Setup
a ZONE2
s ZONE3
a
ZONE2
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system.
s
ZONE3
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.
Bass
Adjust low frequency range (bass).
[Variable range] –10dB
~
0dB
~
+10dB
Treble
Adjust high frequency range (treble).
[Variable range] –10dB
~
0dB
~
+10dB
HPF
When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies, distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to “ON”.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
Lch Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
[Variable range] –12dB
~
0dB
~
+12dB
Rch Level
Adjust the right channel output level.
[Variable range] –12dB
~
0dB
~
+12dB
Channel
Switch between stereo and mono output.
[Selectable items] Stereo Mono
When GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 33) is set to “ZONE (MONO)”, the “Channel” setting is automatically set to “Mono”.
Volume Level
Adjust the main volume level.
[Selectable items] Variable –40dB 0dB
“Variable” is displayed when a power amplifi er is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign”.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB
Power On Level
Defi ne the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
[Selectable items] Last – – – –70dB ~ +18dB
Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
[Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Option Setup
Make various other settings.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Option Setup
a Amp Assign s Volume Control d Source Delete f GUI g Quick Select Name h Trigger Out 1 j Trigger Out 2 k Remote ID l 2Way Remote A0 Dimmer A1 Setup Lock A2 Maintenance Mode A3 Firmware Update
The places where the surround back amplifi er are used can be set freely according to the usage environment. This makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room (the main zone) where surround playback is performed (multi-zone playback) or play the sound
with high quality using the front speakers (bi-amp connections).
a
Amp Assign
Defi ne how the amplifi er for the surround back speaker channels is used.
For details, see “Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 68, 69).
[Selectable items]
7.1CH ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE(MONO) Bi-Amp 2CH
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 37
s
Volume Control
Set the main zone volume setting.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB
Power On Level
This sets the volume set when the main zone’s power is turned on.
[Selectable items] Last – – – –80dB ~ +18dB
Mute Level
This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the main zone.
[Selectable items]
d
Source Delete
Remove input sources that are not used from the display.
[Selectable items] ON Delete
NOTE
• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu
“Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.
Full –40dB –20dB
f
GUI
Make GUI related settings.
Screensaver
Make screensaver settings. Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen. When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity for about 3 minutes.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF
Wall Paper
Change the GUI background.
[Selectable items] Picture Black Gray Blue
Format
Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.
[Selectable items] NTSC PAL
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure described below to change the video format.
Operating from the main unit
q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3
seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the o p button to make the setting. e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.
Text
Text information display.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
Master Volume
Master volume display during adjustment.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
NET/USB / iPod / Tuner
This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation is performed.
[Selectable items] Always 30s 10s OFF
g
Quick Select Name
Change the Quick Select name. Up to 16 characters can be input.
[Input characters] A ~ Z a ~ z
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
0 ~ 9
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Page 38
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Bright Dim
DarkOFF
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
h
Trigger Out 1
Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone, input source, surround mode. For details about the trigger out function, see page 21.
j
Trigger Out 2
This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same way as “Trigger Out 1” above.
[Selectable items]
ON – – –
Setting with Respect to the Zone
• When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.
• Associated with the power supply of zones set to “ON”.
Setting with Respect to the Input Source
• When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.
• Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at “Setting with Respect to the Zone”.
Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode
• When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.
• Associated with respect to surround modes that are set to “ON”.
• This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect to the Zone” is set to “ON”.
• Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected.
k
Remote ID
Set remote control ID. Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver.
[Selectable items]
• When changing the remote ID, also change the AMP, iPod, TU and NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time (vpage 62).
• When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control unit at the same time (vpage 67).
l
2Way Remote
Make setting for 2-way remote control unit.
[Selectable items]
When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI, sold separately), set this to “Used”.
A0
Dimmer
Adjust display brightness of the receiver.
[Selectable items] Bright Dim Dark OFF
Operating from the main unit
Press the DIMMER button.
1 2 3 4
Used Not Used
A1
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent change.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
• When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt to operate related buttons.
GUI menu operations RESTORER Night Mode Parameter Room EQ Channel Level Audio Delay
• To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the “Setup Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”.
A2
Maintenance Mode
This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson or installer. (For professional use only.)
This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the AVR-3808CI’s status and make settings via the Internet.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer.

Page 39

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Language
This sets the language used on the display screens.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
Language
[Selectable items]
English
Français
Operating from the main unit
q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3
seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”. e Use the o p button to make the setting. r Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.
Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings related to playing input sources.
Source Select
Input Source Selection
F Menu tree F
Source Select
TUNER
PHONO
CD
DVD
HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR
V.AUX
NET/USB
XM
Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit
GOperation on the main unitG
Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob. b If “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected for the input source,
press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.
GOperation on the main remote control unitG
Press the SOURCE SELECT button. The desired input source can be selected directly.
(Main unit) (Main remote control unit)
NOTE
• Connection to the network and specifi c settings are required to update the fi rmware. For details, see page 20, 32.
• Do not turn off the power until updating is completed.
• Normally there is no need to use this function, aside from the cases described below. The Firmware Update function is only used for updating the
fi rmware (free or for a charge) via the Internet, for example for the purpose of adding functions to the AVR-3808CI in the future.
Information regarding the Firmware Update function will be
announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are defi ned.
A broadband connection to the Internet is required to use this
function (v page 20).
Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1
hour is required for the updating procedure to be completed. Once updating starts, normal operations on the AVR-3808CI cannot be performed until updating is completed.
Furthermore, updating the fi rmware may reset the backup data for
the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-3808CI.
Display Description
Updating failed Updating failed. Login failed Failure to log into server. Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again. Connection failed Failure connecting to server. Regist failed Failure registering to server.
b If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network
environment, then update again.
A3
Firmware Update
Update the fi rmware of the receiver.
Start
:
Execute the update process. When updating starts, the power indicator lights red. “Updating zzz” is shown on the display during updating. Once updating is completed, “Updating complete” is displayed. “Latest fi rmware” is displayed when the fi rmware is the latest version.
[Selectable items]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 40
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
To operate the AVR-3808CI using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 59 “Remote Control
Unit Operations”).
Settings Related to Playing Input Sources
F Menu tree F
Source Select
TUNER
a Play s Auto Preset d Preset Skip f Preset Name g Input Mode h Rename j Other
PHONO
g Input Mode h Rename j Other
CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX
z
a Play k Playback Mode (iPod) l Assign g Input Mode h Rename j Other
NET/USB
a Play A0 Playback Mode g Input Mode h Rename j Other
z
Source Select
XM
a Play d Preset Skip A1 Antenna Aiming g Input Mode h Rename j Other
z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources
for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
a
Play
The playback screen is displayed.
[Input source]
s
Auto Preset
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
[Input source] TUNER
[Selectable items] Start
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
d
Preset Skip
Set the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.
TUNER NET/USB XM
iPod
(
)
A ~ G
Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.
[Input source] TUNER XM
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items] ON Skip
All 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
f
Preset Name
Assign name to a preset memory. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
A1 ~ G8
Select the preset memory number.
[Input source] TUNER
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
g
Input Mode
Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source. The selectable input modes depend on the input source and “Assign” setting (vpage 39).
Input Mode
Set the input mode for this source.
[Input source] TUNER PHONO
[Selectable items]
[Input source] NET/USB XM
[Selectable items]
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX
[Selectable items]
Auto
HDMI Digital Analog EXT. IN
• When a digital signal is properly input, the “ ” indicator lights on the display. If the “ ” indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.
• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “EXT. IN”.
Analog
Auto
EXT. IN
EXT. IN
iPod
(
)

When set to “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory blocks (A to G).
Page 41
Operating from the main unit or main remote
Auto HDMI Digital
AnalogEXT. IN
z1
z2
control unit
Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on the main remote control unit.
j
Other
Make various other settings.
Video Select
Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.
k
Playback Mode (iPod)
Make settings for “iPod” playback.
Repeat
Make settings for repeat mode.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
z1: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” (vpage 39). Excluding CD.
z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 39).
Decode Mode
Set the decode mode for this source.
[Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
[Selectable items] Auto PCM DTS
• This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital” (vpage 39).
• Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.
h
Rename
Change the display name for this source. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
[Selectable items]
DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX
Operating from the main unit
Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears. b To cancel, press the main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the
main unit’s SOURCE SELECT knob and select “Source”.
Source
NOTE
• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.
• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” cannot be selected.
Video Convert
Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.
[Input source] DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR
V.AUX
[Selectable items]
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to “OFF”.
ON
OFF
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
[Selectable items]
All One OFF
Shuffle
Make settings for shuffle mode.
[Input source]
[Selectable items]
This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned at the “iPod dock” setting.
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
Songs Albums OFF
Source Level
Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
[Variable range]
For input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” are set at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level can be set separately.
–12dB
~
0dB
~
+12dB

Page 42
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
l
Assign
Assign input sources to input connectors.
HDMI
Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.
[Input source]
[Selectable items]
Input source
Default setting
• With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously. When HDMI is assigned to an input source, the audio signal switches to HDMI along with the video signal. To use with the digital audio input connectors assigned, set GUI menu “Input Mode” to “Digital” (vpage 37, 38).
• When the AVR-3808CI and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
• The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors are not output to the monitor.
DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX
HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 None None HDMI4 None
NOTE
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
1 2 3 4 None
Digital
Select digital input connector to assign to this source.
[Input source]
[Selectable items]
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT
VCR DVR V.AUX
Coaxial1 ~ 3 Optical1 ~ 4
DENON LINKz None
Input source Default setting
z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX
Coaxial 3Coaxial
1
connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”.
Coaxial 2Optical 1Optical 3Optical 2Optical
None
NOTE
• This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), XM signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors and the analog REC OUT connectors.
Component
Select component video input to assign to this source.
[Input source]
[Selectable items]
Input source Default setting
DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX
Component 1Component 2Component
NOTE
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
1 2 3 None
None None None None
3
iPod dock
Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR
DVR V.AUX
[Selectable items]
• With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• Even if “iPod dock” is set to “Assign”, if the AVR-3808CI is not
4
connected to a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal input source.
A0
Playback Mode
Assign None
Make settings for “NET/USB” playback.
[Input source]
NET/USB
USB Select
Select USB port to use.
[Selectable items]
Match the port to be used and the setting.
Front Rear
Repeat
Make settings for repeat mode.
[Selectable items]
All One OFF
Random
Make random mode settings.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF
Direct Play
Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items]
Favorites All Music
Page 43
0
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Input signal Display
Dolby
Digital
Source
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC
DOLBY DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD
DTS
Surround
Source
DTS (5.1ch) /
DTS-ES Discrete
6.1 /
DTS-ES Matrix
6.1 /
DTS 96/24
DTS SURROUND DTS+PLgx CINEMA
DTS+PLgx MUSIC DTS+NEO:6 DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1) DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2) DTS 96/24 (z3)
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS-HD Master
Audio
DTS-HD MSTR
DVD-
Audio,
SACD
PCM (multi ch) /
DSD (multi ch)
MULTI CH IN MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN 7.1
Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes at GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” (vpage 41).
z1 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”
and the AVR-3808CI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.
z2 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete
6.1”.
z3 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”.
For details, see page 77.
STANDARD
:
This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing surround sound. The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode.
[Selectable items]
Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)
DOLBY PLgx
DTS NEO:6 neural
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources
[Selectable items]
• When not using a surround back speaker
DOLBY PLg
DTS NEO:6 neural
DOLBY PLgx
or DOLBY PLg
: The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx or
DOLBY PLg for playback.
Cinema
: This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
: This mode is suited for music sources.
Game
: This mode is suited for games.
Pro Logic
: This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can
be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY PL” is displayed.
DTS NEO:6
: The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for
playback.
Cinema
: This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
: This mode is suited for music sources.
neural
: It is possible to play analog input signals and
PCM (2-channel, 48 kHz or less) in the surround mode.
This is the optimum mode for playing sources
recorded in XM HD Surround (vpage 74).
[Selectable items]
Standard Playback
This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according to the program source.
Surround Modes
• When using a surround back speaker
To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit and main remote control unit, press the STANDARD button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.
XM
Satellite
Indicate satellite signal strength.
Terrestrial
Indicate terrestrial signal strength.
A1
Antenna Aiming
Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity.
[Input source]
Display Condition
¡¡¡¡
Signal strength is strong
¡¡¡
Signal strength is good
¡¡
Signal strength is marginal
¡
Signal strength is weak No signal
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 44

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Playback in the Pure Direct Mode
This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound.
• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off.
• If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.
Press the PURE DIRECT button.
Parameter
Cinema Music Game
Pro Logic
z
Audio
Adjust various audio parameters.
F Menu tree F
Parameter
Audio
a Surround Parameters s Tone d Room EQ f RESTORER g Night Mode
h Audio Delay
Cinema Music
Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit.
a
Surround Parameters
Adjust surround sound parameters. The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes (vpage 75, 76).
Mode
Select the mode according to the playback source.
[Selectable items]
In the PLgx or PLg mode:
In the DTS NEO:6 mode:
z: Can be selected in the PLg mode.
The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music.
Input signal
Display
Analog signal /
PCM (2ch) /
Dolby Digital source /
DTS source /
Other 2-channel digital signals
DIRECT
DSD (2ch) DSD DIRECT (z)
PCM (multi ch)
MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC M DIRECT 7.1
DSD (multi ch) DSD MULTI DIRECT (z)
DIRECT
:
In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound. The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal. The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal. For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back output’s play mode.
[Selectable items]
z : When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the
audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH DIRECT” is displayed.
For details, see page 78.
Direct Playback
7CH STEREO
: This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from
all speakers.
WIDE SCREEN
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of
viewing a movie on a large screen.
SUPER STADIUM
: This mode is suited for viewing sports
programs.
ROCK ARENA
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
live concert in an arena.
JAZZ CLUB
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
live concert in a jazz club.
CLASSIC CONCERT
: This mode is for appreciating classical concert
programs.
MONO MOVIE
z
: This mode is for playing monaural movie
sources with surround sound.
VIDEO GAME
: This mode is suited for achieving surround
sound with video games.
MATRIX
: This mode lets you add a sense of expansion
to stereo music sources.
VIRTUAL
: This mode is for enjoying surround effects
using only the front speakers or headphones.
z
: When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE
mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to both channels.
• To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main
remote control unit, press the SIMU button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.
• Depending on the program source being played, it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try other modes to achieve a sound fi eld suited to your tastes.
[Selectable items]
STEREO
:
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted. Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
[Selectable items]
DSP Simulation Playback
The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON original surround modes. The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 77, 78) to achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound fi eld.
Stereo Playback
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 45
Cinema EQ
Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF
DRC
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
[Selectable items] Auto Low Middle High OFF
This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
D.COMP
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
[Selectable items]
When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible software.
OFF Low Middle High
LFE
Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).
[Variable range]
For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend setting to the values below.
• Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB”
• DTS movie sources: “0 dB”
• DTS music sources: “–10 dB”
–10dB
~
0dB
Center Image
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.
[Variable range]
0.0
~
0.3
~
1.0
Dimension
Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.
[Variable range]
0
~ 3 ~
6
Center Width
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.
[Variable range]
0
~ 3 ~
7
Delay Time
Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.
[Variable range]
0 ms
~
30 ms
~
300 ms
Effect
Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF
Effect Level
Adjust effect signal level.
[Variable range]
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.
1
~ 10 ~
15
Room Size
Determine size of acoustic environment.
[Selectable items]
NOTE
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.
Small Medium small Medium
Medium large Large
AFDM
Auto-select surround mode by source. This function only works for software containing a special identification signal. If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES, it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.
ON OFF[Selectable items]
Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag)
• When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically
set to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode.
• To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON”.
Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to “ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLIIx CINEMA”.
SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)
Select playback mode for surround back channels.
[Selectable items]
NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA
ES MTRX
z1: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
z2: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
z3: This can be selected when playing DTS sources. z4: This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a
z3
ES DSCRT
at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker Configuration” setting (vpage 28).
or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” –“Speaker Configuration” setting.
discrete 6.1-channel signal identification signal.
z4
DSCRT ON OFF
z1
PLIIx MUSIC
z2
SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)
Determine whether to use surround back speakers.
ON OFF[Selectable items]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF

Page 46
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Audyssey
Audyssey Byp. L/R
Audyssey Flat
ManualOFF
OFF Mode 1
(RESTORER 64)
Mode 2
(RESTORER 96)
Mode 3
(RESTORER HQ)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Subwoofer Att.
Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN mode.
ON OFF[Selectable items]
d
Room EQ
Select room equalizer for current environment.
[Selectable items]
f
RESTORER
This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer playback sound.
Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD.
Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
[Selectable items]
ON OFF
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
s
Tone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Tone Defeat
Turn tone adjustments off.
ON OFF[Selectable items]
The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT mode.
Bass
Adjust low frequency range (bass).
[Variable range]
–6dB ~ +6dB
Treble
Adjust high frequency range (treble).
[Variable range]
–6dB ~ +6dB
Audyssey
Audyssey Byp. L/R
Audyssey Flat
Manual
OFF
Operating from the main unit or main remote
: Optimize frequency response of all speakers.
: Optimize frequency response of speakers
except front L and R speakers.
: Optimize frequency response of all speakers to
flat response.
: Apply frequency response set with “Manual
EQ”.
: Turn equalizer off.
control unit
Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the main remote control.
When “Audyssey” is selected, “ ” lights.
When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when the auto setup measuring results have changed, “ ” lights.
• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed.
• If the settings of the speakers for which “None” has been determined at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected and measurements have to be taken again to include the newly-added speakers.
• When using headphones, “Room EQ” is always set to “OFF”.
[Selectable items]
OFF
Mode1
Mode2
Mode3
The default setting for “NET/USB” and “iPod” is “Mode3”. All others are set to “OFF”.
(RESTORER 64)
(RESTORER 96)
(RESTORER HQ)
Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit
During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the RSTR button on the main remote control unit.
When set to something other than “OFF”, “ ” is displayed.
About the RESTORER function
• Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio
signals.
• This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to “XM” or “NET/USB”, or when analog signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) are input.
“Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.

Page 47

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
–6
~ 0 ~
+6
0
~
+12
Picture Adjust
Adjust the picture quality.
F Menu tree F
Parameter
Picture Adjust
a Contrast s Brightness d Chroma Level f Hue
[Variable range]
[Variable range]
[Variable range]
[Variable range]
–6
~ 0 ~
+6
–6
~ 0 ~
+6
a
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
• Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue” settings does not affect the HDMI input signal.
• “Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals.
• The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.
s
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
d
Chroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level (saturation).
f
Hue
Adjust color hue.
Information
Power Select Source Volume Level
Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode
Assign Room EQ Video Select Src Level Rec Select
Night Mode RESTORER
etc.
Status
Shows information about current settings.
F Menu tree F
Information
Status
a MAIN ZONE
s ZONE2/3
a
MAIN ZONE
Shows information about settings for main zone. The items displayed differ according to the input source.
s
ZONE2/3
Shows information about settings for multi-zone.
[Items to be checked]
[Items to be checked]
0 ms
~
200 ms
OFF Low Middle High
h
Audio Delay
Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio.
g
Night Mode
Optimized setting for late-night listening.
[Selectable items]
Operating from the main remote control unit
Press the NGT button. The “ ” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is
selected.
OFF Low Middle
High
[Variable range]
Delay audio. This sets the delay time for audio signals.
• This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN, DIRECT or STEREO mode (with “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON” and “Room EQ” to “OFF”).
• The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync Correction function is activated.
Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit
q Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or the A. DL button
on the main remote control unit.
w Use the o p button to set.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 48

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth
HDMI Information
Shows information about HDMI input/output signals and monitor.
F Menu tree F
Information
HDMI Information
a Signal Information s Monitor
Analog/PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5.1ch Multi ch
Auto Surround
Shows information about auto surround mode settings. The surround mode for which the last memory function was used for the different input signal types is displayed.
F Menu tree F
Information
Auto Surround
Interface Supported resol.
[Items to be checked]
[Items to be checked]
[Items to be checked]
a
Signal Information
The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.
s
Monitor
The HDMI monitor information is displayed.
Quick Select
Shows information about quick select settings.
F Menu tree F
Information
Quick Select
1
2
3
Preset Station
Shows information about preset stations.
F Menu tree F
Information
Preset Station
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Input Source Input Mode Room EQ
Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level
A1 ~ G8
TUNER XM NET/USB
[Items to be checked]
[Items to be checked]
[Input source]
For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page
57.
When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status can be checked on the display.
Audio Input Signal
Shows information about audio input signals.
F Menu tree F
Information
Audio Input Signal
Surround Mode
: The currently set surround mode is displayed.
Signal
: The input signal type is displayed.
fs
: The input signal’s sampling frequency is
displayed.
Format
: The number of channels in the input signal (front,
surround, LFE) is displayed.
Offset
: The dialogue normalization correction value is
displayed.
Flag
: “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has
undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the input signal has undergone discrete processing.
Dialogue normalization function
This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources. This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources. The correction value can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit.
The fi gure is the correction value when the standard level is corrected.
[Items to be checked]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 49
<ON/STANDBY> <POWER>
<PHONES>SOURCE SELECT MASTER VOLME
Playback
Playing Video and Audio Equipment
1
Prepare the equipment.
q Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player. (vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.) w To play a video device, switch the monitor input. (vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.)
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
(vpage 59 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.
: “Source Select” (vpage 36, 37)
4
Start playback.
(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
Preparations
1
Press <POWER>.
The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode.
2
Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON].
The power indicator fl ashes green and the power turns on.
To operate the AVR-3808CI using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 59 “Remote Control
Unit Operations”).
Turning the Power Off
q Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF].
The power is set to the standby mode.
w Press <POWER>.
The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.
NOTE
Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power, or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Turning the Power On
Either turn <MASTER VOLUME> or press [MASTER
VOLUME].
Press [MUTE].
To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume.
Plug the headphones into <PHONES>.
The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically cut.
NOTE
Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.
Operations During Playback
Adjusting the Master Volume
Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)
Listening with Headphones
Basic Operation
[POWER ON]
[MUTE]
[POWER OFF]
MASTER VOLUME
SOURCE SELECT
[ AMP]

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 50
Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
2
Press [MEMO].
3
Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is
to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the preset number.
b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].
4
Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
• Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select”
– “Tuner” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 37).
NOTE
Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.
1
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 36, 37)
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE1) mode.
(vpage 59 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.
4
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)
Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use [df] to select the station you want to hear.
w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)
Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use [df] to select the station you want to hear.
Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts
It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing
[TUNER].
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [df] to change frequencies continuously.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage
34).
Basic Operation
<TUNING PRESET> <STATUS>
<SOURCE SELECT>
[BAND]
[df]
[A ~ G]
[CHANNEL]
[1 ~ 8]
[MODE]
[MEMO]
[TUNER]
,
[SHIFT]
[ TU]
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
[df]
[SAT TU]
[ TU]
(DEVICE1 mode)
(AMP mode)
(AMP mode)
(DEVICE2 mode)
Page 51
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-
2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).
1
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 36, 37)
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE2) mode.
(vpage 59 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Use [df] to select the station.
When the station is tuned in, the name of the track and artist are displayed.
• The channel switches continuously when [df] is pressed and held.
• XM Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for
FM/AM stations (vpage 47 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”).
• The artist name, track name, category and reception level can be
checked by pressing <STATUS>.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage
34).
About XM Satellite Radio
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to­the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.
XM Ready® Legal
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800­XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising­supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
XM Ready® Subscriptions
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to fi nd your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini­Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference.
Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs
Basic Operation
Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio station.
Listening to Preset Stations
Operation on the Main Unit
Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit
1
Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block.
2
Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset
channel.
n Default settings
Auto tuner presets
A1 ~ A8
87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 MHz
B1 ~ B8
520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz,
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
C1 ~ C8
90.1 MHz
D1 ~ D8
90.1 MHz
E1 ~ E8
90.1 MHz
F1 ~ F8
90.1 MHz
G1 ~ G8
90.1 MHz

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 52
<STATUS>ENTER
<SOURCE SELECT> uiop
<ON/STANDBY>
[f]
[SAT TU]
uiop
ENTER
[SEARCH]
[NUMBER]
[ TU]
[
8
]
[REPEAT]
[RANDOM]
[
9
]
[2]
[1/3]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
[8], [9], [6], [7], [1], [2]
[ iPod]
[iPod]
[CHANNEL +/–]
[SEARCH]
[ENTER] [uiop]
(DEVICE2 mode)
Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
1
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
Press <STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the
2
display.
The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions.
Display GUI Status GOOD Signal strength is good MARGINAL Signal strength is marginal WEAK Signal strength is weak NO No signal
Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
3
GOOD” is shown on the display.
Press <STATUS> until the station you want to check
4
(example: “XM001”) is displayed.
Press [f] and select channel 0 (XM000).
The radio ID is shown on the display.
5
Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly
Press [SEARCH].
1
Press [NUMBER] then input the station’s channel.
2
Example: Accessing station “XM123”: [1] [2] [3]
b If no button is pressed within several seconds, the station
automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.
Press ENTER to set that station.
Reception switches to the selected station.
3
• “LOADING” is displayed while stations or data are being received.
• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encoding code is being updated.
• “XM - - -” is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used.
(AMP mode)
(Main remote control unit)

About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
(Sub remote control unit)
(AMP mode)
Radio ID
The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked at GUI menu “Source Select” – “XM” – “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 40).
Searching Categories
Press o p.
1
Channel category
Use o p to select the category, then use ui to select
2
the desired station.
Page 53
0
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Shuffl ing playback
Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] Albums
Songs OFF
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shuffl e” (vpage 38)
Searching up or down pages
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up). To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
To switch between the Browse and Remote modes
Either press and hold [SEARCH].
• The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by pressing <STATUS> during playback.
• On the AVR-3808CI, folder and fi le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage
34).
NOTE
• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data.
Listening to Music
1
Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the music fi le to be played.
2
Press ENTER or p.
Playback starts.
Stopping playback temporarily
During playback, press ENTER or [1]. Press again to resume playback.
Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing
During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i (to fast­forward), or press [6] or [7].
To cue to the beginning of a track
During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track) or i (to cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9].
To stop
During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2].
Playing repeatedly
Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] All One OFF
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 38)
1
Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode.
“Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVR-3808CI’s display.
2
Watching the iPod’s screen, use ui to select
“Photos” or “Videos”.
3
Press ENTER until the image you want to view is
displayed.
“TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings” must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.
• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio fi les and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode3”.
• Press <ON/STANDBY> and set the AVR-3808CI’s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock” is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod.
iPod® Playback
The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately). The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
b The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not
copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation.
1
Make the necessary preparations.
q Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod. (vSee the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.) w Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.
Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.
: ”Source Select” (input source)“Assign”
”iPod dock” (vpage 39)
2
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [iPod] (AMP
mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w above.
(iPod screen)
b If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be
properly connected. Try connecting again.
: ”Source Select” (input source)“Play”
(vpage 37)
3
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the iPod mode.
(vpage 59 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
OK to disconnect.
Basic Operation
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod
Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor. (Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions.)
Page 54
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices
This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music files stored on a computer or USB memory device.
n About the Internet radio function
• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in.
The AVR-3808CI is equipped with the following Internet radio
functions:
· Stations can be selected by genre and region.
· Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
· Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio)
format can be listened to.
· Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an
exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer.
b The function is managed for individual users, so you must
provide your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com b The radio station database service may be suspended without
notice.
• The AVR-3808CI’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for the AVR-3808CI.
vTuner services may be discontinued without notice.
n Music server
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (music server) connected to the AVR-3808CI via a network. With the AVR-3808CI’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.
· Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
· Windows Media DRM10
n USB memory devices
A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-3808CI’s USB port to play music files stored on the USB memory device.
· Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-3808CI.
· The AVR-3808CI is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or “FAT32” format.
[Compatible formats]
Internet
radio
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
MPEG-4 AAC
Lossless Audio
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
z: Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the
b Music server and USB
· The AVR-3808CI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2)
· The AVR-3808CI is compatible with WMA META tags.
z
WAV
FLAC (Free
Codec)
AVR-3808CI. Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
standards.
S S S
S S S
Music server
S
b
USB
S S
z
S
S S
b
z
z
[Playable formats]
Sampling frequency
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16~320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
32/44.1/48 kHz 48~192 kbps .wma
32/44.1/48 kHz 32~320 kbps .mp3
32/44.1/48 kHz .flac
Bit rate Extension
Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11
q If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either
download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a Windows update installer.
w Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver.
11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update installer.
b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new
version of Windows Media Player.

Page 55

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Stopping playback temporarily
During playback, press ENTER. Press again to resume playback.
To stop
During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.
Searching up or down pages
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up). To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
Searching by fi rst letter (Character search)
This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or fi les stored on the computer.
q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice. w Use o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search for.
If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are displayed in alphabetical order. If it is not possible to search the list, “Unsorted list...” is displayed.
• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio fi les and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode3”.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 34).
• The display can be switched between the artist name, track name, album name.
ENTER
<SOURCE SELECT> uiop
[NET/USB]
[ NET/DTU]
uiop
ENTER
[SEARCH]
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
1
Make the necessary preparations.
q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVR-3808CI’s
power. (vpage 20 “Network Audio”)
w If settings are required, make the network settings.
(vpage 31, 32 “Network Setup”)
e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.
2
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [NET/USB]
(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.
(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.
: “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play”
(vpage 37)
3
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the NET/DTU (DEVICE 1) mode.
(vpage 59 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
4
Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the fi le you want to play.
5
Press ENTER or p.
Playback starts.
Basic Operation
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffi c, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted.
Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less
tendency for the sound to be interrupted.
• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting.
• On the AVR-3808CI, folder and fi le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”.
1
Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER
or p.
2
Use ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
The station list is displayed.
3
Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER or
p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Listening to Internet Radio
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
(DEVICE1 mode)
(AMP mode)
Page 56
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
ENTER
uiop
[MEMO]
uiop
ENTER
[A ~ G]
[1 ~ 8]
[ NET/DTU]
[REPEAT]
[
8
]
[2]
[RANDOM]
[USB]
[1/3]
[
9
]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Recently Played Internet Radio Stations
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from “Recently Played” in top menu.
Use ui to select “Recently Played”, then press
1
ENTER or p.
Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
(DEVICE1 mode)
(Main remote control unit)
Use ui to select the item you want to play, then
2
press ENTER or p.
NOTE
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
Presetting Internet Radio Stations
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
While the Internet radio station you want to preset is
1
playing, press [MEMO].
Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.
2
Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired
3
preset number.
The Internet radio station is now preset.
NOTE
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared.
Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations
With the input source set to “NET/USB”, press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8].
The AVR-3808CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.
Press [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you
1
want to register is playing.
Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
2
Press o to select “Yes”.
The Internet radio station is registered.
3
If you do not want to register it, press p.
Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites
Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
1
p.
Use ui to select the Internet radio station, then
2
press ENTER or p.
The AVR-3808CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.
Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites
Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
1
p.
Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want
to clear, then press [MEMO].
2
Press o to select “Delete”.
The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
3
To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

(Sub remote control unit)
Page 57

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices
Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-3808CI.
Basic Operation
1
Make the necessary preparations.
Set the USB port to be used.
Set the USB port to be used.
: “Source Select”“NET/USB”“Playback Mode”
“USB Select” (vpage 39)
• Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.
2
Use ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.
3
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press
ENTER or p.
4
Use ui to select the fi le, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Playing fi les that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations.
NOTE
• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
• When the operation described below is performed, the music server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music fi les.
• When you quit the music server and then restart it.
• When music fi les are deleted or added on the music server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server name.
By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used.
Playing Files Stored on a Computer
Use this procedure to play music fi les or playlists.
1
Use ui to select the host name of the computer on
which the music fi le you want to play is located, then press ENTER or p.
2
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press
ENTER or p.
3
Use ui to select the fi le, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
• Connections to the required system and specifi c settings must be made in order to play music fi les (vpage 20).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the fi les as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software.
Selecting tracks
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Playing repeatedly
Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] All One OFF
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Repeat” (vpage 39)
Playing in random order
Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] ON OFF
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Random” (vpage 39)
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected.
• The AVR-3808CI is compatible with MP3 fi les conforming to “MPEG­1 Audio Layer-3” standards.
• If [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed when the USB memory device or folder is selected, all the tracks on the USB memory device or in the folder are played.
NOTE
• The AVR-3808CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/ USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVR-3808CI.
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-3808CI’s USB port using a USB cable.
• The AVR-3808CI is not compatible with the iPod shuffl e.
Selecting tracks
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Page 58

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Operating the AVR-3808CI Using a Browser (Web control)
This function lets you operate the AVR-3808CI using Internet Explorer.
1
Check the AVR-3808CI’s IP address.
: “Manual Setup”“Network Setup”
“Network Information” (vpage 32)
2
Input the AVR-3808CI’s IP address in Internet
Explorer.
The AVR-3808CI can be operated in the same way as with regular Internet browsing.
To use the web control function, set the GUI menu “Manual Setup”– “Network Setup” – “Other” – “Power Saving” setting to “OFF” (vpage 32).
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Other Operations and Functions
Other Operations
Playing Super Audio CDs
1
At the “Digital” or “HDMI” setting (vpage 39),
select the input source for which “DENON LINK” or “HDMI” is assigned.
The “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display.
2
Use INPUT MODE to select “Auto” (vpage 37, 38).
Select the input mode according to the program source to be played.
3
Select the surround mode (vpage 40, 41).
We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.
4
Start playing the Super Audio CD.
The “ ” indicator lights on the display. For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s operating instructions.
• When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are fi rst converted into PCM format, then into analog signals.
• “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT mode.
<ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>
INPUT MODE
<SOURCE SELECT>
CH SELECT
uiop
INPUT MODE
uiop
CH SELECT
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
Surround mode
Surround mode
Page 59
Recording on an External Device
ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ZONE2 XM····
RECOUT XM RECOUT NET/USB RECOUT SOURCE····
(REC OUT mode)
You can listen to one program source while recording a different program source.
Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>.
“ZONE2 SOURCE” is shown on the display.
1
Turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE”
2
is displayed.
The “ ” indicator lights.
Turn <SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source
3
to be recorded.
Play the program source.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
4
operating instructions. To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage
47).
Start recording.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
5
operating instructions.
• To cancel, press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>
until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is displayed.
• Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/ COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.
• Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.
• Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 as well.
• In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE2 mode buttons cannot be operated.
• The “XM” digital audio output signals are not output from the OPTICAL2 or OPTICAL3 output connectors. Also, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) are not output if they are copyright-protected.
NOTE
• Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder.
• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), XM signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT connectors.
• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” cannot be selected.
Convenient Functions
Channel Level
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
Press CH SELECT.
1
Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
2
buttons is pressed.
Use o p to adjust the volume.
3
b “OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is
set to –12 dB.
Fader Function
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front or rear speakers at once.
Press CH SELECT.
1
Press ui or CH SELECT to select “Fader”.
2
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o: front, p: rear)
3
• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is –12 dB.

Page 60
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
QUICK SELECT<POWER>
<STANDARD> <DSP SIMULATION>
QUICK SELECT
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Quick Select Function
With this function, the currently playing input source, input mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in the memory.
Set the input source, input mode, surround mode,
1
room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you want to store.
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT.
Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.
2
Personal Memory Plus Function
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, etc.) last selected for the individual input sources. When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was used.
The surround parameters, tone control, room EQ settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.
[Quick Select Defaults]
Input Source Volume Quick Select 1 DVD –40 dB Quick Select 2 TV/CBL –40 dB Quick Select 3 VCR –40 dB
• To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired
settings were stored.
• The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 34).
NOTE
Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 34). In this case, store them again.
Last Function Memory
This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set. When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set.
Backup Memory
The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Page 61
Resetting the Microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
Turn off the power using <POWER>.
1
Press <POWER> while simultaneously pressing
2
<STANDARD> and <DSP SIMULATION>.
Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1
3
second, release the two buttons.
If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Page 62
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
[ AMP]
[NUMBER]
[HOME]
[MODE SELECTOR]
[RC SETUP]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Remote Control Unit Operations
Main Remote Control Unit
• On the main remote control unit, the display switches according to the device being operated and the mode.
• In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between “DEVICE1” and “DEVICE2” each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is pressed.
• In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the remote ID is set, the AVR-3808CI can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers.
Signal transmission indicator
Operating DENON Audio Components
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
1
operated.
The indicator for the component to be operated flashes.
: AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 /
ZONE4z / SYSTEM CALL
: TUNER (FM/AM) / XM
: NETWORK/USB /
DIGITAL TUNER
: Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
z The AVR-3808CI cannot be used in the ZONE4 or NET/DTU
(DEVICE2) modes.
b The mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.
G
AMP modeG GZONE2 modeG GZONE3 modeG
z
: iPod
: DVD player (Recorder) /
CD player (Recorder)
: VCR / TAPE
: TV
[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP.
Presetting
The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands.
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
preset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the
3
brand of the component to be preset. The numbers are shown in the Preset Code Table (v End of the this manual).
When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator flashes twice. When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes.
b The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10
seconds.
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment, some buttons may not operate.
NOTE
The device mode (“DEVICE1” or “DEVICE2”) cannot be changed while the setting is being made.

GSYSTEM CALL modeG GZONE4 modeG
Operate the component.
2
b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does not operate, try inputting a different code.
Operating Preset Components
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
1
operated.
The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes.
Operate the component.
2
b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Page 63
[MENU]
[CH + /
SHUFFLE],
[CH – /
REPEAT]
[SETUP/
SEARCH]
[ENTER]
[RETURN]
[0 ~ 9, +10]
[uiop]
[1], [8 9], [6 7], [3], [2], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF]
Functions of Buttons by Component
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
EL Display
Buttons
EL Display
MODE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod
Device Mode DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1
Device operated
1
8 9
6 7
3 2
SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off
MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu
u i o p
ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter
SETUP/SEARCH Set up Set up Set up
RETURN Return Return Cancel Return
CH + / SHUFFLE Switch channels
CH - / REPEAT Switch channels
0 ~ 9, +10 Select track Select track Select track Select track
Special Remarks
GSpecial RemarksG
q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared. w The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.
DVD
(Default setting)
Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback/Pause
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)
Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor
DVD Recorder
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
q, w q q q
CD
(Default setting)
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Buttons
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/ fast-forward)
Page forward
screen / Browse/
Remote mode
switching (Press
and hold)
1-track/album
shuffle play
1-track/All-track
repeat play
NOTE
• Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” – “DEVICE1” mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” – “DEVICE2” mode.
• Preset a VCR for the “VCR” – “DEVICE1” mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” – “DEVICE2” mode.
0
Page 64
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
[MENU]
[CH +/–]
[TV/VCR]
[ENTER]
[DISPLAY]
[0 ~ 9, +10]
[uiop]
[SETUP]
[1], [8 9], [6 7], [3], [2], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF]
[CH +/–]
[SEARCH]
[SHIFT]
[A ~ G], [d f], [BAND], [MODE], [MEMO]
[ENTER]
[0 ~ 9]
[uiop]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
EL Display
Buttons
EL Display
EL Display
MODE SELECTOR TV Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
Device Mode DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2
Device operated TV (HITACHI) TV (SONY) SAT SAT
1
8 9
6 7
3 2
SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on
SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off
MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide
u i o p
ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting SETUP Set up Set up Set up Set up
DISPLAY Display Display Display Display
CH + / – Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels
0 ~ 9, +10 Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection
TV/VCR Switch inputs Switch inputs
Special Remarks
GSpecial RemarksG
q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared. e The CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the monitor, satellite receiver and cable TV (vpage 63 “Punch Through
Function”).
Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through
Buttons
Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor
q, e q, e q, e q, e

Buttons
EL Display
MODE SELECTOR TU NET / DTU
Device Mode DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1
Device operated Analog tuner XM NET / USB
A ~ G Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection
d f
BAND AM/FM switching MODE Switch search modes
MEMO Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Preset memory registration
u i o p
ENTER Enter, Playback/Pause
SEARCH Direct search Search
CH + / – Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection
0 ~ 9
SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block Switch memory block
Tuning + / – Channel selection
Buttons
Category search Cursor
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
(1 ~ 8) /
Direct channel search
(0 ~ 9)
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
Page 65
[ AMP]
[NUMBER]
[MODE SELECTOR]
[RC SETUP]
[ TU]
[ iPod]
[ NET/DTU]
Signal transmission indicator
MODE
SELECTOR
AMP
(MAIN)
Remote ID
1
(Default)
2 82001 52795 52812 72816 62837
3 83001 52800 52813 72817 62838
4
81001 52863 52864 72815 62865
84001 52805
DEVICE1
(Analog
TUNER)
TUNER
DEVICE2
(XM)
52814
NET/DTU
DEVICE1
iPod
72818 62839
(Net
Audio /
USB)
Point the main remote control units directly at each
5
other and press and hold the button on the other device’s remote control unit that you want to learn.
Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Other device’s remote control unit
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Setting the Remote ID
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates.
Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the
1
AMP mode.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Refer to the table at the right, and use [NUMBER] to
3
input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote ID to be changed.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
NOTE
• When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-3808CI’s (vpage 35).
• When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the “TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time.
• Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” – “DEVICE1”, the XM remote ID for “DEVICE2”.
Learning Function
If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVR-3808CI’s main remote control unit.
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
set.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning
3
mode is set.
Press the button to be set.
The main remote control unit’s display turns off.
4
b If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission
indicator lights but the signal is not learned.
AVR-3808CI’s main remote control unit (RC-1068)
b If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5. b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if
learning was not possible
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
6
is completed.
With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit.
• Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage
64).
NOTE
[HOME] cannot be learned.
• Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].
• The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned.
Press [TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to
4
be set.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all
5
modes.

Page 66
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
[NUMBER]
[RC SETUP]
[MODE
SELECTOR]
[ AMP]
[POWER
ON]
[SYSTEM
CALL]
[CHANNEL
+/–]
[8], [9], [6], [7], [1], [3], [2]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
transmission
Signal
indicator
System Call Function
This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button. For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input source selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button. Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3).
Registering
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
register.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system
3
call registration mode is set.
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to
4
register the signals.
Press the buttons you want to register in the same
5
sequence as the operations you want to perform.
The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed.
Example : Press [POWER ON]. Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD].
Press [1]. b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to
register.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
6
is completed.
Calling out
Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”.
1
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals
2
were registered.
The registered signals are transmitted in the registered
sequence.
Punch Through Function
CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT/CBL mode buttons. For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode.
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch
3
through setting mode is set.
Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2,
4
6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
5
punch through (TV or SAT/CBL).
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
6
is completed.
Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
1
Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight
2
on time setting mode is set.
Set the light on time.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3
[Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec. [2] : 10 sec. (Default) [3] : 15 sec. [4] : 20 sec. [5] : 25 sec.

Page 67
Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness
The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps. (Default: Step 3)
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
1
Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –].
The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed.
2
The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed.
Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.
3
Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit
Learning Function
GResetting button by buttonG
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
reset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3
Press the button you want to reset twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4
System Call Function
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
1
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.
3
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4
Punch Through Function
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
reset (TV or SAT/CBL).
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4
All Settings
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
1
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
GResetting by device modeG
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
1
reset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
4
reset twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times.
2
All the settings are restored to their defaults.

Page 68
[USB]
[ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES]
[8 9], [2], [1/3], [TUNING d f]
[ZONE SELECT] [ZONE ON]
[ZONE OFF]
[MENU]
[SEARCH]
[MUTE]
[CHANNEL +/–]
[RANDOM]
[REPEAT]
[SOURCE SELECT]
[VOLUME +/–] [SHIFT]
[ENTER] [RETURN]
[uiop]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations
• The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations.
• The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi­zone, so you can use it to control the AVR-3808CI from other rooms.
• The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit.
Remote Control
• It is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier.
Switching the input source
Adjusting the volume
Tuner (AM/FM), XM and iPod operations
NET/USB direct play
GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations
Zone power on/off
Functions of Buttons by Component
Device operated
Zone selection M Z2 Z3 M Z2 Z3 M Z2 Z3
ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection
ZONE OFF ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / – Preset channel selection Preset channel selection
SHIFT
VOLUME + / –
MUTE
MENU Selected zone menu Selected zone menu Selected zone menu
u i o p
8 9,
TUNING d f
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Music server only)
FAVORITES *
b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music ser ver are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 39).
DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR1, VCR, V.AUX,
SAT, CD, PHONO
Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
Preset channel memory block
Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1) Muting (b1) Muting (b1)
Category search
Tuning Channel selection
b
2
b
3
b
4
TUNER
(AM/FM)
Input source selection Input source selection
Preset channel memory block
selection
b
2
b
3
b
4
SAT TU
(XM)
selection
b
b
b
2
3
4

DIRECT PLAY button
• Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”.
FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites. ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder.
• When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device.
NOTE
When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.
Page 69
Device operated NET / USB iPod
Zone selection M Z2 Z3 M Z2 Z3
ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection
ZONE OFF
ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / – Preset channel selection
SHIFT
VOLUME + / –
MUTE MENU Selected zone menu Selected zone menu
u i o p
ENTER File operations File operations
SEARCH
RETURN File operations
8 9,
TUNING d f
2
1/3
REPEAT 1-track/All-track repeat play (USB) 1-track/All-track repeat play
RANDOM 1-track random play (USB) 1-track/album shuffle play
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Music server only)
FAVORITES *
b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music ser ver are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 39).
Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
Preset channel memory block
selection
Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1) Muting (b1)
File operations File operations
Page forward screen /
Character search
Track search Track search
Stop Stop
Play/pause Play/pause
b
2
b
3
b
4
Input source selection
Page forward screen /
Browse/Remote mode switching
(press and hold)
b
2
b
3
b
4
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Remote Control

Page 70
[REPEAT]
[RANDOM]
[MENU]
[ZONE OFF]
[USB] [ALL MUSIC/
FAVORITES]
[ZONE SELECT] [ADVANCED SETUP]
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Remote Control
Multi-zone
indicator
Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)
We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated.
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
All the multi-zone indicators light.
1
Select the multi-zone to be set.
The selected multi-zone indicator lights.
2
q To set to main zone : Press [REPEAT]. w To set to ZONE2 : Press [RANDOM]. e To set to ZONE3 : Press [USB].
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
3
Setting the Remote ID
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates.
While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
1
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes.
Select the remote ID to be set.
2
q To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT]. The “M” indicator flashes.
w To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM]. The “Z2” indicator flashes. e To set to 3 : Press [USB]. The “Z3” indicator flashes. r To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. The “Z4” indicator flashes.
Switching Zones
Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit.
Press [ZONE SELECT].
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
1
While the multi-zone indicator is light, press [ZONE
2
SELECT] to select the zone to be operated.
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

To Cancel
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
1
Press [ZONE SELECT].
All the multi-zone indicators light.
2
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
3
While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
3
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
NOTE
When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-3808CI’s (vpage 35).
Resetting the Settings
While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen.
All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are restored to their defaults.
Page 71
Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and
Z2L Z2R
Z2L Z2R
Z2
FL
SW C FR
B
A
SL
B
A
SR
Z3L Z3R
Z3L Z3R
Z3
Operations
The AVR-3808CI is compatible with the following types of playback:
Multi-zone playback (ZONE2 & ZONE3)
Bi-amp playback (front speaker)
NOTE
• For bi-amp playback, use speakers compatible with that type of connection.
• When conducting bi-amp playback, remove the short-circuiting boards (or wires) from the speaker terminals.
Setting 1 :
F Multi-zone playback
• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback
• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 monaural playback
Main zone
5.1ch
ZONE2
+
Stereo
+
+
Mono
ZONE3
+
+
Stereo
+
Mono
Amp Assign mode:
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE MONO
(Default)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function
The amp assign function lets you assign the amplifiers for the different channels built into the AVR-3808CI to the speaker outputs for the different zones. Select the desired playback environment from among “Setting 1” to “Setting 4”, then set the corresponding “Amp Assign” mode at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 33). Connect the speakers as described at “Amp Assign mode settings and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals”.
“Setting 3” is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 5.1-channel mode and 2-channel mode without changing the speaker connections.
• “STEREO” or “MONO” depends on the setting at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “Channel”
(vpage 33).
• Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.
n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
FRONT
CENTER
SURR-A SURR-B
R L R L R L R L
ZONE2
ZONE3 Z3R Z3L
FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B
ZONE MONO
SURR. BACK /
AMP ASSIGN
Z2R Z2L
Z3
(MONO)
(MONO)
Z2
Multi-Zone

Page 72
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
SBL SBR
FL
SW C FR
B
A
SL
B
A
SR
FL
SW C FR
B
A
SL
B
A
SR
FL
SW C FR
B
A
SL
B
A
SR
Setting 2 :
F 7.1-channel playback
Main zone
Setting 3 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.
F 5.1-channel playback F 2-channel playback
Switching ················Surround Mode switching
7.1ch
Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.
n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
7.1CH FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B SBR SBL
Multi-Zone
FRONT
CENTER
SURR-A SURR-B
R L R L R L R L
SURR. BACK /
AMP ASSIGN
Main zone
5.1ch
Surround Mode
DIRECT / STEREO
Multi Channel /
Main zone
2ch
Amp Assign mode:
2ch
Surround
Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.
n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
2CH FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B FR FL
FRONT
CENTER
SURR-A SURR-B
R L R L R L R L
SURR. BACK /
AMP ASSIGN

Page 73
$
'- 48 '3
4-
43
4#
3
4#
-
Setting 4 :
FL
SW C FR
B
A
SL
B
A
SR
F Making bi-amp connections for the FL and FR channels in the main zone
and conducting 5.1-channel playback
(switching with other modes not possible)
Main zone
5.1ch
FL/FR
Bi-Amp
Amp Assign mode:
Bi-Amp
Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out
Remote control unit
Output
Prepare power amplifiers for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video output
ZONE2 ZONE2 PRE OUT Stereo ZONE2 VIDEO OUT
ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT Stereo
Main zone (7.1-channel system)
Monitor
ZONE2
Monitor
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.
n Amp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
FRONT
R L R L R L R L
Bi-Amp FR FL C SR-A SL-A SR-B SL-B
CENTER
SURR-A SURR-B
SURR. BACK /
AMP ASSIGN
FR FL
FL/FR Bi-Amp
connection
Power amplifier
DVD player
AVR-3808CI
Input
ZONE2 video output
ZONE2 audio output
ZONE3
Remote control unit
ZONE3 audio output
Power amplifier
: Multi-zone video cable : Multi-zone audio cable
• When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”. In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) monaural output is output from the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as desired.
• Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Multi-Zone
0
Page 74
[MUTE]
SOURCE
SELECT
[ON]
[OFF]
VOLUME
[ AMP]
[ON]
[OFF]
SOURCE SELECT
[ZONE SELECT]
[ON] [OFF]
<ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT>
<ZONE2 ON/OFF>
<SOURCE SELECT> <ZONE3 ON/OFF>
<VOLUME>
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
ZONE2 MENU
INPUT :DVD SIGNAL:ANALOG VOL. :-40dB
>Bass 0dB
HPF OFF
Treble 0dB
Lch Lev. 0dB Rch Lev. 0dB
ZONE2 MENU
>Channel STEREO Vol.Lev. VAR
P.On Lev. LAST
Vol.Limit OFF
Mute Lev. FULL
Multi-Zone Operations
Turning the Power On and Off
GOperation on the main unitG
Press <ZONE2 ON/OFF>, <ZONE3 ON/OFF> for the zone to be operated. When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.
Turning off the Sound Temporarily
In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press [MUTE]. The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” (vpage 33). To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again. The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
Multi-Zone
(ZONE2 mode)
(Main remote control unit)
(ZONE3 mode)
GOperation on the remote control unitG
In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF].
Selecting the Input Source
GOperation on the main unitG
q Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. w Turn <SOURCE SELECT>.
GOperation on the remote control unitG
In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].
Adjusting the Volume
GOperation on the main unitG
q Press <ZONE2/3 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. w Turn <VOLUME> to adjust.
GOperation on the remote control unitG
In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME].
– – – –70dB
The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Limit” (vpage 33).
~
–40dB
~
+18dB[Variable range]
• The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors.
• For ZONE2, the “Zone Setup” can be made while watching the on­screen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed watching this on-screen display.
NOTE
• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.
• Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi-zone.
• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.
• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), XM signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.

About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
(Sub remote control unit)
Page 75
'- $
48
'3
43DI4-DI
'- $
48
'3
4-DI 43DI
4#DI
Other Information
About Speaker Installation
Surround back speakers
Number of surround back speakers
We recommend using 2 speakers. When using dipolar speakers in particular, be sure to use 2 speakers.
Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers
We recommend installing the speakers for the surround “L” and “R” channels a bit forward.
w Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type
speakers for the surround speakers
For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.
Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Sound positioning directly to the rear can be achieved easily by adding a surround back speaker to a 5.1-channel system. In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position.
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 5.1-channel systems
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 6.1-channel systems
Examples of speaker layouts
Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them.
G1G Using surround back speaker(s)
q When mainly playing movies
Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way speakers.
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
60°
Surround speakers
60°
Surround back speakers
As seen from above
G
Front speaker
G G
Surround speaker
As seen from the side
Surround back
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
speaker
Point slightly downwards
G
Surround speakers
Front speaker
60°
Surround back speakers
As seen from above
G
G G
e When playing movies and music
Front speakers Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
45° ~ 60°
Surround speaker A
120°
Surround back
speaker
Surround speaker B
As seen from above
G
G G
Surround speaker A
Front speaker
Surround speaker
As seen from the side
60 to 90 cm
As seen from the side
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
2 to 3 feet /
Surround back
speaker
Surround back
speaker
Point slightly downwards
G
Point slightly downwards
Surround speaker B
G
Information
In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL

Page 76
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
G2G When not using surround back speakers
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
60°
Surround speaker
120°
Surround speakers
As seen from above
G
Front speaker
G G
As seen from the side
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
Surround
The AVR-3808CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Information
Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low frequencies. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly prioritizing sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to achieve an excellent surround effect. The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater)
G
to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources.
DTS Surround
DTS Digital Surround
/DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1-channels. There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing games.
b Sources recorded in Dolby Surround
Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks. Dolby Surround support mark :
DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1­channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC” suited for playing music.

Page 77
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a technology designed to provide the optimum listening environment for multiple listeners within the listening area. Test data collected from multiple listening points is analyzed comprehensively and equalization that improves the sound quality for the entire listening area is performed. Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problems in large listening areas, it also fully automates the surround system setup. For a detailed description, see page 25.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
DENON LINK
DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality. It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.
Neural Surround
Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the excitement of surround music to more of America’s listening audience. It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals, and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems. This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM Satellite Radio’s new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music each year.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation. D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents Pending technology. “Neural” and “Neural Audio” and “Neural Surround” are trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. It is licensed under US and National Patent Applications 20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. MultEQ XT and the Audyssey MultEQ XT logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.
HDCD
®
(High Definition Compatible Digital®)
HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution. Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing.
®
, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.
AL24 Processing Plus
AL24 Processing for All Channels
DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency of DVD-Audio. AL24 Processing Plus, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D/A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music. Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right, center and subwoofer channels.
Information

Page 78
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in consumer equipment. Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are transmitted with a single connection. HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI.
Deep Color
Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. Enables increased contrast ratio. Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum, and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.
xvYCC
Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many colors as existing HDTV signals. Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.
Information
Lip Sync
Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end­user adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically with total accuracy.
“HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Surround Modes and Parameters
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Surround Mode
Front L/R Center
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT. IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE1) DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D A D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE2)
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS SURROUND
neural
7CH STEREO
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A S A A A A A A A A A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S A S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A S D D D D A A A A A S D D D D A S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S S (OFF)
S D D D D S (OFF) A A S S (NOTE1) S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) S D D D D A A A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S D D D D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A S A S A A A D S (OFF) S ( 0 dB) A A A
S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable D : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
NOTE1 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”
(vpage 41).
NOTE2 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”
or “Pro Logic” (vpage 41).
NOTE:
z
1 : When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
z
2 : When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.
Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Surround
L/R
Surround
Back L/R
Subwoofer
D. COMP
LFE
z
1
AFDM
z
2
SB CH Out Cinema EQ.
z
1

Page 79
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Surround Mode
Mode Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT
STEREO
EXT. IN
MULTI CH IN
WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S
DTS NEO:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS SURROUND
neural
7CH STEREO
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
A A A A S A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) S A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) A
A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S
A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A S (ON, 10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S
S (Cinema) A A A A A A A S (0.3) A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S
A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE3) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A S (30 ms) A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S
S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable
NOTE3 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB NOTE4 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting.
PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode only
Panorama Dimension Center Width Center Image Subwoofer Att.
NEO:6 MUSIC
mode only
EXT. IN only
Tone Night Mode Room EQ RESTORER
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Page 80
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals
STANDARD
DTS SURROUND
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
DTS ES MTRX6.1
DTS SURROUND
DTS 96/24 DTS + PLgx CINEMA DTS + PLgx MUSIC
DTS + NEO:6
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx CINEMA DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A F A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
neural
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN 7.1
Button
Surround Mode
Note
ANALOG
LINEAR
PCM /
WAV
WMA
(Windows
Media Audio)
/ MP3 /
MPEG-4
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
AAC / FLAC
z
1
z
1
A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A
z
2
z
1
z
1
A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S A A A A A A A A A S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S
z
1
A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S F F F A A A A A
z
2
z
1
A A A A A A A F D S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A
S S S A A A A A A A A S A S A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A S
A A A A A A A A A A A A F A F A
z
2
z
1
A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A
NOTE:
z
1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”.
z
2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.
F : Mode selectable in initial status D : Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON” S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode
z
: HDMI input only
Input signals
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DVD-
Audio
(multi ch)
F D (7.1)
DVD-
Audio
(2ch)
z
DSD
(multi ch)
A A
A A A
DSD (2ch)

Page 81
Button
Surround Mode
DIRECT
DIRECT
DSD DIRECT
DSD MULTI DIRECT
MULTI CH DIRECT M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC
M DIRECT 7.1
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
DSD PURE DIRECT
DSD MULTI PURE
MULTI CH PURE DIRECT M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC
M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1
DSP SIMULATION
7CH STEREO
WIDE SCREEN
SUPER STADIUM
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
CLASSIC CONCERT
MONO MOVIE
VIDEO GAME
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
STEREO
STEREO
Note
ANALOG
LINEAR
PCM /
WAV
WMA
(Windows
Media Audio)
/ MP3 /
MPEG-4
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
AAC / FLAC
S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A
z
2
z
1
A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A
S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A
z
2
z
1
A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A
z
3
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
F F F S S S S S S S S S S F S F
NOTE :
z
1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”.
z
2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.
z
3: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.
F : Mode selectable in initial status S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode
Input signals
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1/5/4ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(4/3ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DVD­Audio (multi
ch)
DVD-
Audio
(2ch)
DSD
(multi
ch)
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
DSD (2ch)

Page 82
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
About Networks
Windows Media Player ver.11
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation. It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.
vTuner
This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs. For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
DLNA
Windows Media DRM
A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.
• Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM­DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
• Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.

Page 83
Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output
n Main zone
Video Convert
ON
With HDMI
Without HDMI
with HDMI monitor off
monitor
monitor
or
HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO
A A A A b A A A S A A S A A A S S A S (1080p) A A A A S (480p ~ 720p) A A A S (480i/576i) A A A S (1080p) A S A S (480p ~ 720p) A S A S (480i/576i) A S A S (1080p) S A A S (480p ~ 720p) S A A S (480i/576i) S A A S (1080p) S S A S (480p ~ 720p) S S
A S (480i/576i) S S S A A A S A A S S A S A S A S S S S (1080p) A A S S (480p ~ 720p) A A S S (480i/576i) A A S S (1080p) A S S S (480p ~ 720p) A S S S (480i/576i) A S S S (1080p) S A S S (480p ~ 720p) S A S S (480i/576i) S A S S (1080p) S S S S (480p ~ 720p) S S S S (480i/576i) S S S A A A A A S A A S A S A S A A S A S S A S S (1080p) A A A S S (480p ~ 720p) A A A S S (480i/576i) A A A S S (1080p) A S A S S (480p ~ 720p) A S A S S (480i/576i) A S A S S (1080p) S A A S S (480p ~ 720p) S A A S S (480i/576i) S A A S S (1080p) S S A S S (480p ~ 720p) S S A S S (480i/576i) S S A
S : Signal present A : No signal
480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p
Input signal Monitor output Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)
z
b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b
A : No output
z
z
z
z
1
VIDEO
z
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT
1
z
1
z z
z
1
z z
z
1
z z
z
1
z z
HDMI HDMI VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 HDMIz2 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO HDMI S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENTz1 HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 HDMIz2 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENTz1 HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT
1 : The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made. 2 : Superimposed over video signal 3 : Only displayed when the MENU button is
pressed
4 : If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is
VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
1
COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
1
COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4
COMPONENTz1
1
COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
1
COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
1
COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
1
COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
1
COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
1
VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEO z4 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1
converted to PAL for output
A A A A
A
VIDEO
A A A
A A A A
A
A A A A A A
A
VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT
VIDEO
b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “A to H” is set) (vpage 30).
: Wallpaper or set background color displayed : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “H to H” is set) (vpage 30). : GUI menu not displayed
b
z3
z
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
2
VIDEO
z
S-VIDEO S-VIDEO z3 COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT COMPONENT S-VIDEO*2 COMPONENT COMPONENT
2
z
2
z
COMPONENTz2
2
z
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
2
z
2
z
COMPONENTz2
2
z
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
2
z
2
z
COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
2
z
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
2
z
COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO
2
z
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2 COMPONENT HDMIz2 COMPONENT
2
A A A
COMPONENTz2
A A A A A A A A A A
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
z
3
VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
z
3
VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2
z
3
z
3
A A
A
z
3
z
3
VIDEO
S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
A A A
A A A A
A
z
3
VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
z
3
VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2
z
3
z
3
A A
A
VIDEO
z
3
z
3
VIDEO
S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting
Information
• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60.
• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
• If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.
• The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
0
Page 84
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting
Video Convert
OFF
HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO
A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A S A A A S (VIDEO) S S S S A A S A A A S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S A A S S A A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S A S A A A S (COMPONENT) A A S S S S A S A S A S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S S S S A S S A A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S
A S S S A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S S A A A S (HDMI) A A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A A S S (HDMI) A A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A S A S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A S S S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S S A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S S S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A
S : Signal present A : No signal
SIGNAL IN MONITOR OUT (Normally) MONITOR OUT (when GUI menu displayed)
To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.
n ZONE2
Information
Input
S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
A A A
A S S (VIDEO) S A S (S-VIDEO) S S S (S-VIDEO)
S : Signal present A : No signal
S : Output present A : No output
MONITOR OUT
S : Output present A : No output
z
2 : Superimposed over video signal

Page 85
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
GGeneralG
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Power does not turn on, or turns off directly after it was turned on.
No sound is produced from speakers.
Display is off. • The “Dimmer” setting is set to
“DOLBY DIGITAL” indicator does not appear on display.
• Connection of the power cord is faulty.
• Connection with the input devices or connection of the speaker cables is faulty.
• Device you want to play and set input source do not match.
• Master volume is turned too low.
• Mute mode is set.
• Headphones are connected.
• No digital signals are being input.
• The connectors to which the digital inputs are assigned and the settable input modes do not match.
“OFF”.
• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.
• DVD player’s digital audio output setting is not proper.
• Check that the power plugs are securely inserted into the AVR­3808CI’s AC inlets and the wall power outlet.
• Check the connections.
• Select an appropriate input source.
• Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level.
• Cancel the mute mode.
• Disconnect the headphones.
• Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been made.
• Set the input mode.
• Set to something other than “OFF”.
• Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT mode.
• Check the DVD player’s audio output setting. For details, read the DVD player’s operating instructions.
22
9
36, 37
46
46 46 39
39
35
40, 41
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Power turns off suddenly and power indicator flashes red.
GRemote Control UnitG
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Set does not work properly when remote control unit operated.
• Protection circuit activated due to rise of internal temperature.
• Core wires of two speakers are touching each other or a core wire is sticking out of the terminal and touching the set’s rear panel, activating the protection circuit.
• Speakers with an impedance other than specified are being used.
• Set is damaged.
• Batteries are worn.
• You are operating outside of the specified range.
• Obstacle between main unit and remote control unit.
• The batteries are not inserted in the proper direction, as indicated by the polarity marks in the battery compartment.
• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.).
• The remote ID of the main unit and remote control unit do not match.
• Turn off the power, wait for the set to fully cool down, then turn the power back on.
• Place the set in a well-ventilated place.
• First unplug the power cord, then twist the core wires tightly or terminate the speaker cables, then reconnect.
• Use speakers with the specified impedance.
• Turn off the power and contact a DENON service center.
• Replace with new batteries.
• Operate within the specified range.
• Remove the obstacle.
• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, following the polarity marks in the battery compartment.
• Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
• Set the same remote IDs for the main unit and remote control unit.
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
10
10
10
10
3 3
3
3
3
35, 62

Page 86
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
GAudioG
No sound is produced from center speaker.
No sound is produced from surround speakers.
No sound is produced from surround back speaker.
No sound is produced from subwoofer.
No test tones are produced when main remote control unit’s TEST TONE button is pressed.
DTS sound is not output.
HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers.
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
• You are playing a monaural source (TV, AM radio broadcast, etc.) in the STANDARD (Dolby/ DTS Surround) mode.
• The surround mode is set to “STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
• The surround back speaker’s power amplifier is assigned to a different channel.
• Surround back speaker setting is set to “None”.
• Surround mode not set to a mode for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.
• Subwoofer’s power not turned on.
• The “Subwoofer” setting at “Speaker configuration” is set to “No”.
• The subwoofer is not properly connected.
• The subwoofer’s volume is turned off.
• Surround mode not set to “ S TA ND A RD ” ( D o lb y / D T S Surround).
• DVD player’s audio output setting is not set to bitstream.
• DVD player is not compatible with DTS sound playback.
• The AVR-3808CI’s “Decode Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.
• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to “TV”.
• The mode is set to something other than “STANDARD (Dolby/ DTS Surround)”.
• Set to a surround playback mode.
• Check the setting and change it as necessary.
• Set to something other than “None”.
• Select a surround playback mode.
• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
• Set to “Yes”.
• Check the connections.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume to an appropriate level.
• Set to the STANDARD (Dolby/ DTS Surround) mode.
• Set the DVD player. For details, refer to the DVD player’s operating instructions.
• Use a DTS-compatible player.
• Set to the “Auto” or DTS mode.
• Set to “Amp”. 30
41
40, 41
33
28
40, 41
28
56
40
38
9
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
No sound is output from the monitor connected with HDMI connections.
GVideoG
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
The on-screen display does not appear.
No picture appears.
No picture appears with HDMI connections.
Picture cannot be recorded.
DVDs cannot be copied on a VCR.
• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to “Amp”.
• The format of the GUI and TV (NTSC or PAL) do not match.
• The connections between the AVR-3808CI and monitor are faulty.
• The monitor’s input setting is wrong.
• PURE DIRECT mode is set.
• The player is connected using the component input connectors, the monitor is connected using the video (yellow) or S-Video output connectors.
• The connections to the HDMI connectors are faulty.
• HDMI input setting is improper.
• The monitor is not compatible with copyright protection (HDCP).
• The HDMI format of the player and monitor do not match.
• Input source does not match recorder’s video connection connector (video or S-Video).
• Set to “TV”. 30
• Match the format of the GUI and TV.
• Check the connections.
• Set properly.
• Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.
• High definition (1080i/720p) and progressive (480p/576p) video signals are not down-converted. Set the player to interlace (480i/576i) signals.
• Check the connections.
• Check the HDMI input setting.
• Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP).
• Match the HDMI format of the player and monitor.
• The video conversion function does not work for the REC OUT connectors. Match the input source and recorder connections.
• This is not a malfunction. Most movie software includes copy prevention signals and cannot be copied.
34
11 ~ 22
40, 41
11
39 11
11
15

Page 87
GiPodG
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
iPod cannot be played.
GNET/USBG
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
When a USB memory device is connected, “USB” is not displayed on the GUI menu.
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.
The file names are not displayed properly (“...”, etc.).
• The input source assigned to “iPod dock” is not selected.
• Cable is not properly connected.
• Control Dock for iPod’s AC adapter is not connected to power outlet.
• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device.
• A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards is connected.
• The set port and the connected port do not match.
• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
• USB memory device is connected via USB hub.
• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.
• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions.
• Files are stored in a non­compatible format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected.
• Characters that cannot be displayed are used.
Switch to the input source assigned at “iPod dock”.
• Reconnect.
• Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s AC adapter into a power outlet.
• Check the connection.
• Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.
• Connect to the port set at “USB Select”.
• This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power.
• Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.
• Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memor y device’s operating instructions.
• When divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition can be played.
• Record the files in a compatible format.
• Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• This is not a malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “ . (period)”.
39
13
18
39
51
51
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Internet radio cannot be played.
Files stored on a
computer cannot be played.
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.
Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations.
For some radio stations, “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed and station cannot be connected to.
Sound is broken during playback.
Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy.
• Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected.
• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting.
• IP address is wrong.
• Files are stored in a non­compatible format.
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected.
• Set and computer are connected by USB cable.
• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated.
• Computer’s power is not turned on.
• Server is not running.
• Set’s IP address is wrong.
• Radio station is not currently broadcasting.
• Radio station is not currently in service.
• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting.
• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested.
• File being played has a low bit rate.
• Check the connection status.
• Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set.
• Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting.
• Check the set’s IP address.
• Record in a compatible format.
• Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.
• The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
• Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
• Turn on the power.
• Launch the ser ver.
• Check the set’s IP address.
• Wait a while before trying again.
• It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
• Wait a while before trying again.
• This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions.
• This is not a malfunction.
20
51
52
32 51
51
32
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

Page 88
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
GXM Satellite RadioG
”CHECK ANTENNA” is displayed in the XM mode.
”NO SIGNAL” is displayed in the XM mode.
”OFF AIR” is displayed in the XM mode.
Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1.
Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
• AVR-3808CI’s XM connector and the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock is not properly connected.
• The signal cannot be received. • Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner
• The selected channel is not currently broadcasting.
• The XM Tuner is not activated. • Contact XM Radio. 48
• Check that the connections are correct.
and Home Dock antenna.
• Select another channel. 48, 49
18
49

Page 89
Specifications
Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information TroubleshootingGetting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting
Audio section
• Power amplifier Rated output: 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center: 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround (A + B): 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back: 130 W + 130 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
160 W + 160 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Dynamic power:
210 W x 2ch (4 Ω/ohms)
Output connectors:
Surround: A or B A + B
• Analog Input sensitivity / Input impedance: Frequency response: S/N: Distortion: Rated output:
• Digital D/A output: Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio — 102 dB Dynamic range — 96 dB Digital input:
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT) Input sensitivity: RIAA deviation: S/N: Rated output: Distortion factor:
Front:
140 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms)
Front, Center, Surround back 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
8 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode) 102 dB (IHF-A weighted, DIRECT mode)
0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
1.2 V
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Format — Digital audio interface
2.5 mV ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input) 150 mV
0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Video section
• Standard video connectors Input / output level and impedance: Frequency response:
• S-Video connectors Input / output level and impedance:
C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response:
• Color component video connector Input / output level and impedance:
P P
Frequency response:
Tuner section [FM] [AM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 18 µV 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf) S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB STEREO 72 dB Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15 % STEREO 0.3 %
General
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz Power consumption:
0.3 W (Standby)
Maximum external dimensions: Weight: 17.8 kg (39 lbs 3.9 oz)
Main remote control unit (RC-1068)
Batteries: LR6/AA Type (two batteries) Maximum external dimensions: Weight: 190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries)
Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)
Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries) Maximum external dimensions:
Weight: 114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries)
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
b
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
B / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms R / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
-15
W)
7.2 A
434 (W) x 171 (H) x 420 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 6-47/64” x 16-17/32”)
63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64” x 9-3/8” x 1-7/32”)
49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm (1-59/64” x 8-21/32” x 31/32”)

Page 90
List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés
Denon Amp
Denon 81001, 82001, 83001, 84001
D
Denon Tuner
Denon (Analog) 52863, 52795, 52800, 52805
D
Denon (XM Radio) 52864, 52812, 52813, 52814
Denon Digital Tuner
Denon (NET/USB) 62865, 62837, 62838, 62839
D
Denon iPod
Denon 72815, 72816, 72817, 72818
D
Cable
A-Mark 00008, 00144
A
ABC 00237, 00003, 00008 Accuphase 00003 Acorn 00237 Action 00237 Active 00237 ADB 01230 Aichi Denshi 01512 Americast 00899 Amstrad 01222 Archer 00237 Auna 01230 Austar 00276 BCC 00276
B
Bell South 00899 Bestlink 00303 Birmingham Cable
Communications British Telecom 00003 Cable & Wireless 01068
C
Century 00008 Coship 01462 Daehan 00778
D
Daeryung 01877, 00877, 00477, 00008 Digeo 01187 Director 00476 DX Antenna 01500 Emerson 00303
E
Encon 00008 Fosgate 00276
F
Foxtel 01222 France Telecom 00817 Freebox 01482
PRESET CODE
00276
Fujitsu 01497 Galaxi 00008
G
GE 00237, 00144 Gehua 00476 General Instrument 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003 Gibralter 00003 GNI 01466 GoldStar 00144 Hitachi 00003, 00008
H
Hongtian Jiangsu 01462 Hwalin 00303 Insight 00476, 00810
I
Jerrold 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003
J
Jiuzhou 01445 KNC 00008
K
LG 00144
L
Macab 00817
M
Madritel 01230 Maspro 01510 Matav 01082 Memorex 00000 Mitsubishi 00003
Motorola
MS 00303 NEC 01496
N
Noos 00817 Nova Vision 00008 Novaplex 00008 NTL 00276, 00003, 01060, 01068 Oak 00303
O
Ono 01068 Optus 00276, 01060
Pace
P
Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00144, 01488 Paragon 00000, 00008, 00525 Penney 00000 Philips 01305, 00317, 00817
Pioneer
Pulsar 00000 PVP Stereo Visual
Matrix Quasar 00000
Q
RadioShack 00303
R
Regal 00276 Runco 00000 Sagem 00817
S
Salora 00000
Samsung
01376, 00476, 00810, 00276, 01187
01877, 00877, 00237, 00008, 01060, 01068, 01577
01877, 00877, 00144, 00533, 01500
00003
00003, 00000, 00144, 00778, 00840, 01060, 01666
Scientific Atlanta
Skyworth 01464 Sony 01006, 01460 Sprucer 00144 Starcom 00003 StarHub 00276 Sumitomo 01500, 01504 Supercable 00276 Taihan 00778
T
TCL 01445 Telewest 01068 Time Warner cable 01877 TongKook 00840 Torx 00003 Toshiba 00000, 01509 Trans PX 00276, 00303 TS 00003, 00303 United Cable 00276, 00003
U
US Electronics 00276, 00003, 00008 Videoway 00000
V
Visiopass 00817 Zenith 00000, 00525, 00899
Z
01877, 00877, 00477, 00237, 00003, 00000, 00008, 01510
Cable/PVR Combination b1
Americast 00899
A
Digeo 01187
D
Freebox 01482
F
General Instrument 00810
G
Jerrold 00810
J
Motorola 01376, 00810, 01187
M
Pace 01877, 00237
P
Pioneer 01877, 00877 Scientific Atlanta 01877, 00877
S
Sony 01006 Supercable 00276 Time Warner cable 01877
T
Zenith 00899
Z
CD Player
Acoustic Research 40420
A
Advantage 40032 Aiwa 40157 Arcam 40157 Audio Research 40157 Audiolab 40157 Audiomeca 40157 Audioton 40157 AVI 40157
Balanced Audio
B
Technology Burmester 40420
Bush 40388 Cairn 40157
C
California Audio Labs Cambridge 40157 Cambridge Audio 40157
Cambridge Soundworks
Carver 40157, 40179 CDC 40420 CEC 40420 Copland 40393 Curtis Mathes 40032 Cyrus 40157
Denon
D
DKK 40000 DMX Electronics 40157 Dual 40003 Dynaco 40157 Dynamic Bass 40179 Fisher 40000, 40179
F
Garrard 40393, 40420
G
Genexxa 40000, 40032, 40037, 40179 Goldmund 40157 Grundig 40157 Hafler 40173
H
Harman/Kardon 40100, 40157, 40173 Hitachi 40032 Inkel 40157
I
Integra 40101 Jerrold 40003
J
JVC 40032, 40072
Kenwood
K
KLH 41318 Krell 40157 Linn 40157
L
Loewe 40157 Luxman 40393 LXI 40179 Magnavox 40157
M
Marantz 40029, 40157 Matsui 40157 MCS 40029
Memorex
Meridian 40157 Micromega 40157 Miro 40000 Mission 40157
40157
40029, 40303
40157
40873, 40003, 40766,
[42867]z, 42868
40681, 40000, 40029, 40157, 40028, 40037, 40036, 40190
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468
Modulaire
MTC 40420 Musical Fidelity 40393 Myryad 40157 NAD 40000, 40721
N
Naim 40157 NSM 40157 Onkyo 40868, 40101
O
Optimus
Orion 40393 Panasonic 40029, 40303, 40388, 40752
P
Parasound 40420 Penney 40029 Philips 40157 Pioneer 40032, 40101, 40468 Polk Audio 40157 Proceed 40420 Proton 40157 QED 40157
Q
Quad 40157 Quasar 40029 Radiola 40157
R
RadioShack
RCA
Realistic
Restek 40157 Revox 40157 Roksan 40420 Rotel 40157, 40420 Royal 40420 SAE 40157
S
Saisho 40000 Sansui 40000, 40157 Sanyo 40000, 40087, 40179 SAST 40157 Sears 40179 Sharp 40037 Siemens 40157 Silsonic 40036 Simaudio 40157 Sonic Frontiers 40157
Sony
Sugden 40157 Sylvania 40157 TAG McLaren 40157
T
Tandy 40032 Tascam 40393, 40420
40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468
40000, 40032, 40037, 40087, 40179, 40393, 40420, 40468
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468 40032, 40053, 40179, 40420, 40468 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468
40490, 40000, 40100, 41364, 40185
Page 91
Teac 40490, 40393, 40420 Technics 40029, 40303 Techwood 40303 Thomson 40053 Thorens 40157 Thule Audio 40157 Tokai 40420 Universum 40157, 40053
U
Victor 40072
V
Wadia 40393
W
Wards
Yamaha 40490, 40868, 40032, 40036
Y
Yorx 40000
40000, 40032, 40157, 40053, 40087, 40179
CD Recorder
Denon 40766, 42868
D
JVC 40072
J
RCA 40053, 40420
R
Sony 40000, 40100, 41364
S
Teac 40420
T
Thomson 40053
Tape Deck
Aiwa 20029, 20197, 20200, 21315
A
Akai 20283, 20439 Arcam 20076 Audiolab 20029 Carver 20029
C
Denon
D
Fisher 20074
F
Garrard 20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
G
Genexxa 20439 GoldStar 20375 Grundig 20029, 20375 Harman/Kardon 20182, 20029, 21314
H
Inkel 20070, 20071, 20337
I
JVC
J
Kenwood
K
LG 20375
L
Luxman 20308, 20309 Magnavox 20029
M
Marantz 20029, 20009 Memorex 20099 Mitsubishi 20283, 20439 Myryad 20029 Onkyo 20135, 20136, 20282
O
Optimus 20027, 20220, 20337, 20439 Orion 20308, 20309
20076, 20371, 21311,
z
[22471]
20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304, 20310, 21309 20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, 20234, 21364
Palladium 20375
P
Panasonic 20229 Philips 20029, 20229 Phonotrend 20337
Pioneer
Polk Audio 20029 Radiola 20029
R
RCA 20027, 20220 Revox 20029 Sansui 20029, 20009
S
Sanyo 20074 Sharp 20231, 20371 Sherwood 20337 Sonic 20375
Sony
TaeKwang 20439
T
Tandberg 20109
Teac
Technics 20229 Technovox 20229 Thorens 20029 Universum 20375, 20439
U
Victor 20244, 20273, 20274
V
Wards 20027, 20029
W
Wharfedale 20439 Yamaha 20097, 20094
Y
20027, 20220, 20099, 20109, 21306, 21312
20243, 20170, 20291, 20234, 21313
20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, 20309
HDTV Tuner b1
ABS 01272
A
Accurian 01653 Alienware 01272 CyberPower 01272
C
D-Link 01554
D
Dgtec 01363 Epson 01563
E
Gateway 01272
G
Hewlett Packard 01272, 01267
H
Howard Computers 01272 HP 01272, 01267 Hush 01272 iBUYPOWER 01272
I
LG 01415
L
Linksys 01272, 01365 Media Center PC 01272
M
Microsoft 01272, 01805 Mind 01272 Motorola 01363 Niveus Media 01272
N
Northgate 01272
Packard Bell 01272
P
Panasonic 01120 Pioneer 01010 Ricavision 01272
R
Samsung 01190, 01490
S
Sensory Science 01126 Sharp 01010 SMC 01456 Sony 01272, 01324, 01364 Stack 9 01272 Sylvania 01563 Systemax 01272 Tagar Systems 01272
T
Toshiba 01272 Touch 01272 Viewsonic 01272, 01329
V
Vizio 01126 Voodoo 01272 Xbox 01805
X
ZT Group 01272
Z
Satellite Receiver
@sat 01300
A
@Sky 01334 A-Mark 00345 ABsat 00123, 00713
ADB
AGS 00710 Aiwa 01514 Akai 00200
Alba
Allsat 00200, 01043 Alltech 00713 Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412 AlphaStar 00772 Amitronica 00713
Amstrad
Anglo 00713 Ankaro 00713 AntSat 01083 Apollo 00455 Arcon 01043, 01075 Armstrong 00200 Arnion 01300 Asat 00200 ASCI 01334 ASLF 00713 AssCom 00853 Astacom 00710
00642, 01259, 01367, 01418, 01473, 01491
00455, 00713, 01284, 01659, 01811
00345, 00713, 00795, 00847, 00863, 00882, 01113, 01175, 01693, 01801
Aston 00142 Astra 00713 Astratec 01743
Astro
Atlantic Telephone 01333 Atsat 01300 AtSky 01334 Audioline 01672 Aurora 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433
Austar
Axiel 00710 Axil 01457, 01659 Axis 01111 B@ytronic 01412
B
Beko 00455 Bell ExpressVu 00775 Big Sat 01457 Black Diamond 01284 Blaupunkt 00173 Blue Sky 00713 Boca 00713, 01232, 01366 Boston 00710, 01251 Brainwave 00658, 01672
British Sky Broadcasting
Broco 00713 BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662 BT 00710, 01296 Bubu Sat 00713
Bush
Canal 00853
C
Canal Digital 00853, 01622 Canal Satellite 00853, 01339, 01853 Canal+ 00853 Centrex 01457 CGV 01413, 01567 Chaparral 00216 Cherokee 00123, 00710 Chess 00713, 01085, 01334, 01626 Chili 01718
CityCom
Classic 01672 Clatronic 01413 CNS 01367 Comag 01232, 01366, 01412, 01413 Condor 01700 Conia 01695 Contec 00394 Continental Edison 01695 Coship 01457
00173, 00658, 01099, 01100, 01113
00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 01176, 01259
00847, 01175, 01662, 01847
01284, 01645, 01672, 01743, 01811
00299, 00394, 00818, 01075, 01176, 01232
Crossdigital 01109 Crown 01284 Cryptovision 00455, 00795 Cyfra+ 01076 Cyrus 00200 D-box 00723, 00873, 01114
D
Daewoo 00713, 01111, 01296, 01743 Delfa 00863 Deltasat 01075 Dgtec 01542, 01631, 01242 Digenius 00299 Digiality 01685 Digifusion 01645, 01743 DigiLogic 01284 DigiQuest 00863, 01300, 01457, 01473 DigiSat 01232 Digisky 01457 DigitAll World 01227 Digiturk 01076 Digiwave 01631 Dijam 01296 DiPro 01367, 01543
DirecTV
Discovery 00710 Dish Network System Dishpro 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775 Distratel 01283, 01704 DMT 01075 DNT 00200 Dream Multimedia 01237 DSE 01375 DSTV 00642, 00879, 01433 Durabrand 01284 DX Antenna 01530
Echostar
E
Einhell 00713 Elap 00713, 01567 Elsat 00713 Elta 00200, 01659 Emme Esse 00871 Energy Sistem 01631 Engel 00713, 01251 EP Sat 00455 Esat 00879 Eurieult 00882
01377, 00392, 00566, 00639, 01639, 01142, 00247, 00749, 01749, 00724, 00819, 01856, 01076, 01108, 00099, 01109, 01414, 01442, 01609, 01392, 01640
01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
01505, 01005, 00775, 00455, 00610, 00713, 00853, 00871, 01086, 01200, 01323, 01409, 01418, 01473, 01775
PRESET CODE
Page 92
Eurocrypt 00455 EuroLine 01251 Europa 00863 Europhon 00299 Eurosky 00262, 00299 Eurostar 00818 Eutelsat 00713 Expressvu 00775, 01775 Fenner 00713
F
Ferguson 00455, 01291, 01743 Finlandia 00455 Finlux 00455 Flair Mate 00713 FMD 01251, 01413, 01457 Force 01101 Fortec Star 01083
Foxtel
Fracapro Planet 00871 Fracarro 00125, 00871 France Telecom 00871 Freesat 00882 FTE 00863 FTEmaximal 00713, 00863
Fuba
Fugionkyo 00125 Funai 01377
Galaxis
G
Gardiner 00818 Garnet 01075 GbSAT 01214 GE 00392, 00566 Gecco 01412 General Instrument 00869 General Satellite 01176 GF Good Friends 01043 GF Star 01043
Globo
GOD Digital 00200 GOI 00775, 01775 Gold Box 00853 Gold Vision 01631 Golden Interstar 01283 GoldStar 00394 Goodmans 00455, 01284, 01291 Gradiente 00887 Granada 00455
Grundig
Handan 01622
H
Hanseatic 01099, 01100
00455, 00497, 00795, 00879, 01162, 01176, 01356
00173, 00262, 00299, 00394, 01214, 01251, 01801
00853, 00863, 01101, 01111, 01557
01251, 01334, 01412, 01429, 01626
00173, 00345, 00847, 00853, 00879, 01291
Hauppauge 01672 HB 01214, 01801 HDT 01159 Hills 01232
Hirschmann
Hisense 01535
Hitachi
Homecast 01214, 01680, 01700 Hornet 01300 Houston 00775 HTS 00775, 01775
Hughes Network Systems
Humax
Huth 01075 Hyundai 01075, 01159 iCan 01367
I
ID Digital 01176 ILLUSION sat 01557, 01631 iLo 01535 Imperial 01334, 01429, 01672 Indovision 00887 Ingelen 00882 Innova 00099 Interstar 01214 InVideo 00871 ISkyB 00887 Italtel 00871 ITT Nokia 00455, 00723, 00873 Jadeworld 00642
J
Jaeger 01334 Jerrold 00869 Jiuzhou 01450 JOK 00710 JVC 00775, 01507, 01531, 01775 K-SAT 00713
K
Kamm 00713 Kaon 01300 KaTelco 01111
Kathrein
Kennex 00125 Kenwood 00853 Klap 00710 Kocmoc TB 01333 Koscom 01043 Kosmos 00442, 01333 Kreiling 00249, 00658
00125, 00173, 00299, 00710, 00882, 01085, 01111, 01232, 01412
00749, 00819, 00455, 01250, 01284, 01518, 01523, 01525
01142, 00749, 01749, 01442
00863, 01176, 01225, 01406, 01427, 01675, 01743, 01790, 01915
00123, 00173, 00200, 00249, 00394, 00442, 00480, 00504, 00658, 00713, 00818, 01221, 01416, 01561, 01567
Kreiselmeyer 00173 Kross 01695 L&S Electronic 01043, 01334
L
Labgear 01296 LaSAT 00173, 00299 Lava 01631 Legend 01718 Legrand 01718 Lemon 01334 Lenco 00713 Lenoxx 01611 LG 01075, 01414 Lifesat 00299, 00713, 01043 Lodos 01284 Logik 01284 Logix 01075 Lorenzen 00299 Luxor 00345, 00873 M Electronic 00818
M
M vision 01557 Magnavox 00724, 00722 Manata 00710, 00713 Manhattan 00455, 00710, 01083 Marantz 00200 Maspro 00173, 00713, 01530 Master’s 00394 Matsui 00173, 00710, 01284, 01743 Maximum 01075, 01334, 01685 McIntosh 00869 MDS 01225 Mediabox 00853 Mediacom 01206 MediaSa 00853
Medion
Medison 00713 Mega 00200 Memorex 00724
Metronic
Metz 00173 MiCO 01811 Micro 00713 Micro Elektronic 00713 Micro Technology 00713 Micromaxx 00299 Microstar 01075 Microtec 00713 Mitsubishi 00749, 00455 Morgan’s 00200, 00713, 01232, 01412 Motorola 00869, 00856, 01473 MTEC 01214 Muller 01695
00299, 00713, 01043, 01075, 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626
00713, 00818, 01283, 01334, 01375, 01704
Multibroadcast 00642, 00879
Multichoice
Mx Onda 01659 Myryad 00200 Mysat 00713 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 NEC 01519
N
NEOTION 01334 Netgem 01322 Netsat 00099, 00887 Neuf TV 01322 Neuhaus 00713 Neuling 01232 Neusat 00713 Nevir 01659 Next Level 00869 Nikko 00200, 00713, 00723 Noda Electronic 01704
Nokia
Nordmende 00455, 01611 OctalTV 01505
O
Okano 00442 Omega 00887 Opentel 01232, 01412
Optex
Optimus 00724 Optus 00879 Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412 Orbitech 01099, 01100 Origo 00497 OSAT 00345 P/Sat 01232
P
Pace
Pacific 01284, 01375 Packard Bell 01111 Packsat 00710 Palcom 00299, 01409 Panarex 01159 Panasat 00615, 00879, 01333, 01433
Panasonic
Panda 00173, 00455 Pansat 01159 Patriot 00710 Paysat 00724 peeKTon 01457
00642, 00879, 01333, 01433, 01559, 01560
00455, 00723, 00751, 00853, 00873, 01023, 01223, 01723
00394, 00713, 01043, 01283, 01611
00200, 00329, 00455, 00497, 00795, 00847, 00853, 00887, 01175, 01323, 01356, 01423, 01693, 01717, 01848, 01850
00247, 00701, 00455, 00847, 01304, 01404, 01508, 01526, 01527
01142, 00749, 01749, 00775, 00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,
Philips
Phonotrend 00863, 01200 Pilotime 01339 Pino 01334
Pioneer
Planet 00871 Plasmatic 00442 PMB 00713, 01611 Polytron 00394 Portland 01296 Preisner 00262, 01101, 01113, 01366 Premier 00723, 00853, 00873, 01429 Prima 00795 Primacom 01111 Primestar 00869 Profile 00710 Promax 00455 Proscan 00392, 00566 Proton 01535 QNS 01367, 01402, 01404
Q
Quadral 00710 Quelle 00299 Radiola 00200
R
RadioShack 00566, 00775, 00869 Radix 00394, 00882, 01113, 01317
RCA
Rebox 01214 Regal 01251 RFT 00200 Roadstar 00713, 00853 Rollmaster 01413 Rover 00713 Rownsonic 01567 SAB 01251
S
Saba 00710, 00820 Sabre 00455
Sagem
Samsung
Sat Control 01300 Sat Team 00713 SAT+ 01409 Satec 00713 Satelco 01232 Satplus 01100
00099, 00710, 00455, 00818, 00200, 00847, 00853, 00173, 01114, 00133, 01442, 01543, 01672
01142, 00329, 00853, 01308, 01442
00392, 00566, 01142, 00775, 00855, 00143, 01291, 01392, 01442
00820, 01114, 01253, 01307, 01690 01377, 01142, 01276, 01108, 01109, 00853, 00863, 01206, 01442, 01458, 01570, 01609, 01700, 01916
PRESET CODE
Page 93
Satstation 01083 Schaub Lorenz 01214 Schneider 00710, 01206, 01251
Schwaiger
SCS 00299 Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626 SEG 01075, 01087, 01251, 01626 Seleco 00871 Septimo 01375 Serd 01412 Serino 00610 Servimat 01611 ServiSat 00713, 01251 Sharp 01517 Siemens 00173, 01334, 01429 Silva 00299 Skantin 00713 SKR 00713
SKY
SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01847, 01848 Sky Television 01014 Sky XL 01251, 01412 Sky+ 01175
Skymaster
Skymax 00200 Skyplus 01232, 01334, 01412 SkySat 00713 Skyvision 01334 SL 00299, 01672 SM Electronic 00713, 01200, 01409
Smart
Sony
Star 00887 Star Choice 00869 Star Trak 00772, 00869 Starland 00713 Starlite 00200 Stream 01847, 01848
Strong
Sunkai 00123 Sunny 01300 Sunsat 00713 Sunstar 00642 Supernova 00887 SVA 01455 Systec 01334
00394, 00504, 00863, 01075, 01083, 01111, 01317, 01334, 01412, 01457
00856, 00099, 00847, 00887, 01014, 01175, 01662, 01693, 01847, 01848, 01850
00713, 01075, 01085, 01200, 01334, 01409, 01567, 01611
00713, 00882, 01101, 01113, 01232, 01404, 01413 00639, 01639, 00455, 00847, 00853, 01524, 01558, 01640
00125, 00713, 00820, 00853, 00879, 01159, 01284, 01300, 01409, 01626
Tantec 00455
T
Tarbs 01225 Tatung 00455 TBoston 01659 Teac 01225, 01227, 01251, 01322 Tecatel 01200
TechniSat
Technomate 01283, 01610 Technosonic 01672 Technotrend 01429 Techwood 01284, 01626
Tele System Electronic
Teleciel 01043 TeleClub 01367 Telefunken 00710 Teleka 00262, 00442
Telestar
Telesystem 01801 Televes 00455, 01214, 01300, 01334 Televisa 00887 Telewire 01232 Tevion 00713, 01409, 01622, 01672
Thomson
Thorn 00455 Tiny 01672 Tioko 00394 Tivo 01142, 01442 Tokai 00200 Tonna 00455, 00713, 01611 Topfield 01206, 01208, 01545, 01783
Toshiba
TPS 00820, 01253, 01307
Triax
Trio 01075 TT-micro 01429 Turnsat 00713 Twinner 00713, 01611 UEC 00879, 01162, 01333, 01356
U
UltimateTV 01392, 01640 Uniden 00724, 00722 Unisat 00200 United 01251
Universum
US Digital 01535 USDTV 01535
00262, 00455, 00863, 01099, 01100, 01195, 01197, 01322
01251, 01409, 01611, 01801
01099, 01100, 01251, 01334, 01610, 01626
00392, 00566, 00455, 00710, 00713, 00820, 00847, 00853, 01046, 01175, 01291, 01534, 01543, 01662
00749, 01749, 00790, 00819, 00455, 01285, 01501, 01516, 01530
00200, 00713, 00853, 01113, 01227, 01251, 01291, 01296, 01626
00173, 00299, 01087, 01099, 01251
Variosat 00173
V
Ventana 00200 Vestel 01251 VH Sat 00299 Viasat 01682 ViewSat 01232 Visionic 00125, 01283 VisionNet 01557
Visiosat
Viva 00856 Vivid 01162 Voom 00869 VTech 00818 Wavelength 01232, 01413
W
Wewa 00455 Wharfedale 01284 Winbox 01801 Wintel 00299 Wisi 00173, 00299, 00455
Worldsat
Xcom 00123
X
XMS 01075
Xsat
Xtreme 01300 Yakumo 01413
Y
Yamada 01718 Yes 00887
Zehnder
Z
Zenith 00856, 01856 Zeta Technology 00200 Zodiac 01801
00142, 00710, 00713, 01413, 01457, 01718
00123, 00710, 01214, 01251, 01543
00123, 00713, 00847, 01214, 01323
00394, 00504, 00818, 01075, 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412, 01413
Satellite Receiver/ PVR Combination b1, b3
b1
@sat 01300
A
Allvision 01412 Amstrad 01175 Atsat 01300 B@ytronic 01412
B
British Sky Broadcasting
BskyB 01175, 01662 Bush 01645 Canal Satellite 01339
C
Comag 01412 Digifusion 01645
D
DigiQuest 01300 Digiturk 01076
01175
DirecTV
Dish Network System Dishpro 01505, 00775 DMT 01075 Dream Multimedia 01237 Echostar 01505, 00775, 00610
E
Expressvu 00775 Foxtel 01356
F
GbSAT 01214
G
Gecco 01412 Globo 01412 HDT 01159
H
Hirschmann 01412 Homecast 01680
Hughes Network Systems
Humax 01176, 01427, 01675 Huth 01075 Hyundai 01075, 01159 Kaon 01300
K
Kathrein 00249, 00658, 01221, 01561 LG 01075
L
Maximum 01334
M
Mediacom 01206 Medion 01412 Microstar 01075 Morgan’s 01412 Motorola 00869 MTEC 01214 Multichoice 01333, 01559, 01560 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 NEOTION 01334
N
Nokia 01023 Opentel 01412
O
Orbis 01412 Pace 01175, 01356, 01423, 01850
P
Panasonic 01304 Philips 01142, 00099, 01442 Pilotime 01339 Proscan 00392 Radix 01317
R
RCA 01392 Rebox 01214 Sagem 01253, 01307
S
Samsung 01206, 01442, 01570, 01609 Sat Control 01300 Schneider 01206 Schwaiger 01075, 01412 Sedea Electronique 01206 Serd 01412 SKY 01175, 01693, 01848, 01850
01377, 00392, 00639, 01142, 01076, 00099, 01392, 01442, 01640
01505, 00775
01142, 01442
SKY Italia 01848 Sky XL 01412 Skymaster 01075 Skyplus 01412 Sony 00639, 01640 Star Choice 00869 Strong 01300 Sunny 01300 TechniSat 01195, 01197
T
Thomson 01175, 01534, 01662 Topfield 01206, 01545, 01783 TPS 01253, 01307 Xtreme 01300
X
Zehnder 01075, 01412
Z
b3
Hughes Network
H
Systems Philips 20739
P
Samsung 20739
S
20739
Television
888 10264
1
A-Mark 10047, 10054, 10009
A
A.R. Systems
Accent 10009, 10037 Accuscan 10047 Accuscreen 10001 Acoustic Research 11269 Action 10030, 10650 Acura 10009 Addison 10092, 10108, 10653 ADL 11217
Admiral
Advent
Adventuri 10000 Adyson 10217 AEG 11163, 11556 Agashi 10217, 10264 Agna 10150
Aiko
Aim 10706, 10037, 10455, 10805 Aiwa 10264, 10701, 11904, 11911
Akai
10037, 10352, 10374, 10455, 10556
10047, 10054, 10017, 10051, 10093, 10463, 10180, 10163, 10264, 10418 10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842, 10876, 11933
10092, 10009, 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, 10433
10000, 10060, 10812, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10145, 10602, 10606, 10631, 10648, 10672, 10714, 10715, 11207, 11537, 11675, 11676, 11903, 10556, 10548, 10480, 10433, 10371, 10361, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10037, 10035, 10009
PRESET CODE
Page 94
Akashi 10009, 10860 Akiba 10037, 10218, 10455 Akira 10418 Akito 10037
Akura
Alaron 10170
Alba
Albatron 10700, 10843 Alfide 10672 All-Tel 10865, 11269 Alleron 10030, 10170 Allorgan 10217 Allstar 10037 Ambassador 10150 America Action 10180 American High 10000, 10060 Amplivision 10217, 10370
Amstrad
Amtron 10000, 10180
Anam
Anam National 10250, 10037, 10650 Andersson 11149, 11163 Anglo 10009, 10264 Anhua 10051 Anitech 10009, 10037, 10264
Ansonic
AOC
Aolinpike 10264
Apex Digital
AR 10352, 10556 Arc En Ciel 10109 Arcam 10217 Ardem 10037, 10714 Aristocrat 10163 Aristona 10037, 10556 ART 11037 Arthur Martin 10163 ASA 10070 Asberg 10037 Asora 10009 Astra 10037 Asuka 10217, 10218, 10264 ATD 10698 Atlantic 10001, 10037
PRESET CODE
10171, 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264, 10668, 10714, 11037, 11498, 11556, 11982
10009, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10163, 10218, 10352, 10370, 10371, 10418, 10443, 10487, 10668, 10714, 11037
10000, 10171, 10009, 10011, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10371, 10433, 10648, 11037, 11982
10250, 10180, 10009, 10037, 10700, 10861
10009, 10037, 10163, 10370, 10374, 10668 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10009, 10108
10156, 10748, 10879, 10765, 10767, 11217, 11943
Atori 10009 Auchan 10163 Audinac 10180
Audiosonic
Audioton 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486
Audiovox
Audioworld 10698 Aumark 10060 Autovox 10217 Aventura 10171 AVP 10000
Awa
Axion 11937, 11958 Axxent 10009 Baier 10876
B
Baihe 10009, 10264 Baile 10001, 10009, 10374, 10661
Baird
Bang & Olufsen 10565 Baohuashi 10264 Baosheng 10009, 10817 Barco 10163, 10556
Basic Line
Bastide 10217 Bauer 10805
Baur
Baysonic 10180 Bazin 10217 Beaumark 10017, 10178, 10030
Beijing
Beko
Belcor 10030 Bell & Howell 10054, 10017, 10154, 10093 Belson 10698, 11191 Belstar 11037 BenQ 11032, 11756 Beon 10037, 10163, 10218, 10418 Berthen 10668 Best 10370 Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374 Bestar-Daewoo 10374 Binatone 10217
Black Diamond
10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370, 10374, 10486, 10714, 10715, 10820
10451, 10180, 10092, 10623, 10802, 10875, 11937, 11951, 11952
10451, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10108, 10217, 10264, 10374, 10606
10037, 10073, 10109, 10208, 10217, 10343, 11196
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10556, 10668, 11037, 11163
10037, 10195, 10361, 10455, 10512
10812, 10001, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817, 10821 10037, 10195, 10370, 10418, 10486, 10606, 10714, 10715, 10808, 11037
10614, 10820, 10821, 11037, 11163, 11909
Blackway 10218
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boots 10009, 10217 BPL 10037, 10208 Bradford 10180
Brandt
Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10486, 10668 Brionvega 10037, 10362 Britannia 10217 Brockwood 10178, 10030
Broksonic
Brother 10264 BSR 10163 BTC 10218
Bush
Caihong 10009, 10817
C
Cailing 10748 Candle 10030 Canton 10218
Capehart
Capetronic 10030 Capsonic 10264 Carad 10610, 10668, 11037 Carena 10037, 10455 Carnivale 10030 Carrefour 10036, 10037, 10070 Carver 10054, 10170 Cascade 10009, 10037 Casio 10037 Cathay 10037, 10218 CCE 10037, 10217 Celebrity 10000 Celera 10765 Celestial 10767, 10819, 10820, 10821 Centrex 10780 Centrum 11037 Centurion 10037 CGE 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
Changcheng
Changfei 10009, 10374, 10817 Changfeng 10264, 10817 Changhai 10009, 10817
10036, 10170, 10195, 10200, 10327, 10455 10037, 10218, 10455, 10487, 10499, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037, 11191, 11363
10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625, 10714
10236, 10463, 10180, 11911, 11938
11900, 11556, 11037, 10778, 10714, 10698, 10668, 10661, 10614, 10556, 10487, 10374, 10371, 10361, 10335, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10037, 10036, 10009
10017, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10036
10051, 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817
10156, 10765, 10009, 10264,
Changhong
Chengdu 10009, 10817 Ching Tai 10092, 10009
Chun Yun
Chunfeng 10009, 10264 Chung Hsin 10180, 10053, 10036, 10108 Chunsun 10009, 10817 Cimline 10009, 10218 Cinema 10672 Cineral 10451, 10092 Cinex 10648, 11556 Citek 10047
Citizen
City 10009 Clarion 10180 Clarivox 10037, 10070, 10418 Classic 10030, 10092, 10499
Clatronic
Clayton 11037 CMS Hightec 10217
Colortyme
Commercial Solutions Concorde 10009
Condor
Conia 10820, 10821, 11498 Conic 10178 Conrac 10808
Conrowa
Contec 10180, 10009, 10036, 10037 Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487 Cosmel 10009, 10037 Craig 10180, 10171
Crosley
Crown
Crown Mustang 10672 CS Electronics 10218 CTX 11756
Curtis Mathes
CXC 10180 Cybertron 10218 Cytronix 11298 D-Vision 10037, 10556, 11982
D
10508, 10767, 10783, 10817, 10819, 10820, 10821, 11008, 11156
10000, 10180, 10092, 10009, 10700, 10843
10054, 10000, 10451, 10463, 10180, 10060, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10001, 10035
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370, 10371, 10714
10047, 10054, 10017, 10060, 10178, 10030
11447, 10047
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, 10418
10156, 10145, 10009, 10264, 10698, 11156, 11170
10054, 10000, 10180, 10030, 10171, 10074, 10163, 10370 10093, 10180, 10053, 10009, 10037, 10208, 10370, 10418, 10486, 10487, 10606, 10672, 10712, 10714, 10715, 11037
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10145, 10166, 10037, 10035, 11147, 11347
10154, 10451, 10180, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11661, 10634, 10661, 10672, 10700, 10860,
Daewoo
Dainichi 10218
Dansai
Dantax 10370, 10486, 10714, 10715 Datsura 10208 Dawa 10009, 10037 Daytek 10672, 11207 Dayton 10092, 10009, 11207
Daytron
Dayu 10374, 10661 De Graaf 10163, 10208, 10548 Decca 10037, 10217 Degraff 10163, 10208 Deitron 10374 Dell 11080, 11178 Denko 10264 Denon 10145, 10511 Denver 10037, 10587 Desmet 10009, 10037 Diamant 10037
Diamond
Digatron 10037 Digiline 10037, 10668 Digital Life 10872 Digitex 10820 Digitor 10037 Digix Media 10880 Dixi 10009, 10037, 10217 DL 10587, 10780, 10872 Domeos 10668 Domland 10394 Dongda 10009 Donghai 10009 Dream Vision 11164, 11704 DSE 10698, 10820, 11556 DTS 10009
Dual
Dual Tec 10217
Dumont
Durabrand
Dux 10037 Dwin 10093 Dynatech 10217 Dynatron 10037
10865, 10876, 10880, 11755, 11756, 11909, 10623, 10556, 10499, 10374, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10170, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10009
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10208, 10217
10180, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10374
10706, 10009, 10371, 10672, 10698, 10820, 10860
10037, 10217, 10343, 10352, 10394, 11037, 11137
10017, 10180, 10178, 10070, 10217 10463, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11034, 11463
Page 95
Easy Living 11248
E
Eaton 10060 Ecco 10773 ECE 10037 Edison-Minerva 10487
Elbe
Elcit 10163 Electroband 10000 Electrograph 11755
Electrohome
Elekta 10009, 10264 Elfunk 11037, 11208 ELG 10037 Elin 10009, 10037, 10361, 10548 Elite 10037, 10218 Elta 10009, 10264 Emerald 10178
Emerson
Envision 10030, 10813 Enzer 10860 Erae 11371 Erres 10037 ESA 10812, 10171, 11944 ESC 10037, 10217 Ether 10030, 10009 Etron 10001, 10009, 10163, 10820 Eurofeel 10217, 10264 Euroman 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370 Europa 10037 Europhon 10037, 10109, 10217 Evesham Technology 11248 Evolution 11756 Expert 10163 Exquisit 10037 Feilang 10009
F
Feilu 10009, 10817 Feiyan 10264 Feiyue 10009, 10817 Fenner 10009, 10374 Fer0 10335
Ferguson
Fidelity
Filsai 10217
Finlandia
10037, 10217, 10218, 10362, 10610
10154, 10000, 10463, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10073
10047, 10017, 10154, 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10171, 11944, 11911, 11909, 10714, 10668, 10623, 10486, 10036, 10371, 10370, 10361, 10037, 10195, 10170, 10070, 10073
10053, 10037, 10073, 10109, 10195, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10443, 10548, 10560, 10625, 11037 10171, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, 10512
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10548
Finlux
Firstar 10236, 10009
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Force 11149 Formenti 10037, 10163 Fortress 10093 Fraba 10037, 10370
Friac
Frontech 10009, 10163, 10217, 10264 Fujimaro 10865, 11498
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General 10009, 10217, 10683 Fujitsu Siemens 10808, 10809, 11163, 11298
Funai
Furi 10145, 10264, 10817 Furichi 10860 Futronic 10264, 10860 Futuretech 10180 Galaxi 10037
G
Galaxis 10037, 10370 Ganxin 10817 Gateway 11755, 11756 GBC 10009, 10163, 10218, 10374
GE
GEC 10037, 10163, 10217, 10361 Geloso 10009, 10163, 10374 Gemini 10047 General 10109, 10287 General Technic 10009 Genesis 10009, 10037 Genexxa 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218
Gericom
Gevalt 11371 Giant 10009, 10217 Gibralter 10017, 10000, 10030 Go Video 10060, 10886 Go Vision 11937 Goldfunk 10668
GoldStar
10037, 10070, 10163, 10217, 10346, 10480, 10556, 10631, 10714, 10715, 10808, 11556
10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10361, 10374, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037, 11191, 11363, 11371 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10036, 10208, 10217, 10361, 10370 10037, 10218, 10264, 10455, 10610
10009, 10037, 10370, 10499, 10610
10009, 10217, 10352, 10683, 10809, 10853
10000, 10180, 10171, 10264, 10668, 11271, 11904
11447, 10047, 11454, 10000, 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11922, 11917, 11347, 11147, 10625, 10560, 10335, 10035
10808, 10865, 10880, 11217, 11298
10047, 10054, 10154, 10178, 10030, 10715, 10714, 10606, 10455, 10361, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10073, 10037, 10036, 10009, 10001
Gooding 10487
Goodmans
Gorenje 10370 GPM 10218 Gradiente 10053, 10037, 10170
Graetz
Gran Prix 10648
Granada
Grandin
Gronic 10217
Grundig
Grundy 10180, 10195 Grunkel 11163 Grunpy 10180 H & B 10808
H
Haaz 10706
Haier
Haihong 10009 Haiyan 10264, 10817 Halifax 10217, 10264 Hallmark 10236, 10180, 10178 Hampton 10217 Hanimex 10218 Hankook 10180, 10178, 10030
Hanseatic
Hantarex 10009, 10037, 10865 Hantor 10037
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon 10054 Harsper 10865 Harvard 10180 Harwa 10773, 11196, 11269 Harwood 10009, 10037, 10487 Hauppauge 10037 Havermy 10093
HCM
Heathkit 10017 Helios 10865 Hello Kitty 10451
10000, 11909, 11900, 11163, 11037, 10880, 10808, 10714, 10668, 10661, 10634, 10625, 10587, 10560, 10556, 10499, 10487, 10480, 10374, 10371, 10343, 10335, 10264, 10218, 10217, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009
10163, 10361, 10371, 10487, 10714, 11163
10036, 10037, 10108, 10163, 10208, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10548, 10560 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10610, 10668, 10714, 10715, 10865, 10880, 11037, 11191
10706, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10195, 10443, 10487, 10556, 10587, 10672, 10683, 11371
11034, 10037, 10508, 10587, 10698, 11017
10009, 10037, 10217, 10361, 10370, 10394, 10499, 10556, 10634, 10661, 10714, 10808
10000, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 11904
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10418
Hema 10009, 10217 Hewlett Packard 11494, 11502 Hifivox 10109 Highline 10037, 10264 Hikona 10218 Hikone 10218
Hinari
Hisawa 10218, 10455, 10610, 10714
Hisense
Hitachi
Hitachi Fujian 10150, 10108, 10860 Hitec 10698 Hitsu 10009, 10218, 10455, 10610 Hoeher 10714, 10865, 11163, 11556 Home Electronics 10606 Hongmei 10093, 10009, 10264, 10817 Hongyan 10264, 10817 Hornyphon 10037 Hoshai 10218, 10455 HP 11494, 11502 Hua Tun 10009 Huafa 10145, 10009 Huanghaimei 10009 Huanghe 10009, 10817 Huanglong 10009 Huangshan 10009, 10264, 10817 Huanyu 10217, 10264, 10374, 10817 Huaqiang 10264 Huari 10145, 10264 Hugoson 11217 Huodateji 10051 Hygashi 10217 Hyper 10009, 10217 Hypersonic 10361
Hypson
Hyundai
Iberia 10037
I
ICE
ICeS 10218 Iiyama 10877, 11217
10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10208, 10218, 10264, 10352, 10443
10156, 10748, 10145, 10009, 10208, 10508, 10556, 10780, 10821, 10860, 11022, 11156, 11170, 11208, 11363 10047, 10054, 10017, 10000, 11256, 10156, 10051, 10150, 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, 10092, 10744, 10877, 10634, 11037, 11137, 11149, 11156, 11170, 11225, 11576, 11904, 11960, 10578, 10548, 10508, 10499, 10481, 10480, 10343, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10009
10037, 10217, 10264, 10455, 10486, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037 10849, 10860, 10865, 10876, 11556
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371
Ima 10236, 10180, 10178 Imperial 10037, 10074, 10370, 10418
Imperial Crown
Indiana 10037 Infinity 10054 InFocus 11164 Ingelen 10163, 10487, 10610, 10714 Ingersol 10009 Inno Hit 10009, 10217, 10218, 11163 Innova 10037 Innowert 10865, 11298 Inotech 10773, 10820 Insignia 10171, 11517 Inteq 10017, 10145 Interbuy 10009, 10037, 10264
Interfunk
Internal 10037, 11909
Intervision
Irradio 10009, 10037, 10218, 10371 Isukai 10037, 10218, 10455 ITC 10217 ITS 10037, 10218, 10264, 10371
ITT
ITT Nokia
ITV 10037, 10264, 10374 IX 10877 JBL 10054
J
JCB 10000 JDV 11982
Jean
JEC 10035 Jensen 10761, 10815, 10817, 11933 Jiahua 10051 JiaLiCai 10009, 10264 JIL 10030 Jinfeng 10051, 10208, 10226, 10817 Jinque 10009, 10264, 10817 Jinta 10009, 10264
Jinxing
JMB 10443, 10499, 10556, 10634 JNC 10876 Jocel 10712 Johnson 10455 Jubilee 10556 Juhua 10264, 10817 Jutan 10030
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661
10037, 10109, 10163, 10200, 10327, 10361, 10512
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10394, 10455, 10486, 10487
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10610 10070, 10163, 10195, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610
10156, 10051, 10236, 10092, 10009, 10036
10054, 10156, 10145, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10556, 10698, 10817, 10821, 11011
PRESET CODE
Page 96
10054, 10093, 10463, 10053,
JVC
Kaige 10009, 10264, 10817
K
Kaisui
Kambrook 10217 Kamp 10017, 10180, 10217
Kangli
Kangyi 10009, 10264 Kapsch 10163, 10361
Karcher
Kathrein 10556 Kawa 10371 Kawasho 10030 KB Aristocrat 10163 KDS 11498 KEC 10180, 10060
Kendo
Kennedy 10163 Kennex 10668, 11037 Kenwood 10180, 10030 Khind 10706 KIC 10217 Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455 Kioto 10706, 10556 Kiton 10037, 10668
KLH
KLL 10037 Kloss 10030
Kneissel
Kolin
Kolster 10037, 10218 Kongque 10009, 10264, 10817 Konichi 10009 Konig 10037
Konka
Kontakt 10487 Korpel 10037 Korting 10370 Kosmos 10037 Koyoda 10009 Kreisen 10876 KTV 10463, 10180, 10030, 10217 Kuaile 10009, 10264 Kulun 10009
Kunlun
10030, 10070, 10036, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10508, 10606, 10650, 10653, 10683, 10731, 11253, 11923
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817
10264, 10370, 10606, 10610, 10714, 10778, 11556
10037, 10362, 10370, 10610, 10648, 11037
10156, 10180, 10765, 10767, 11962
10037, 10362, 10370, 10374, 10499, 10556, 10610 10180, 10150, 10053, 10036, 10108, 11331
10180, 10037, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10587, 10641, 10714, 10817, 11084
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817
Kyoshu 10418 Kyoto 10163, 10217 L&S Electronic 10714, 10808, 10865
L
Lark 10154 LaSAT 10486 Lavis 11037 Leader 10009 Lecson 10037 Legend 10009 Lenco 10037, 10374, 10587 Lenoir 10009 Lexsor 11196 Leyco 10037, 10264
LG
Liesenk & Tter 10037 Liesenkotter 10037, 10327
Lifetec
Lihua 10817
Lloyd’s
Local India TV 10009, 10208, 10602 Local Malaysia TV 10698 Lodos 11037
Loewe
Logik
Logix 10668 Longjiang 10264, 10817 Luker 11982
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May 10009, 10037
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
M
Madison 10037 MAG 11498 Magnadyne 10054, 10163 Magnafon 10073
Magnasonic
10054, 11265, 10060, 10178, 10030, 11758, 11637, 11191, 11178, 10856, 10715, 10714, 10700, 10698, 10556, 10370, 10361, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10009, 10001
10009, 10037, 10218, 10374, 10668, 10683, 10714, 11037, 11137
10236, 10180, 10030, 10001, 10009, 11904
10037, 10370, 10512, 10633, 10790 10236, 10180, 10060, 10001, 10009, 10011, 10371, 10698, 10773, 10880, 11037, 11217
10009, 10163, 10362, 10374, 11037 10037, 10073, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10556
10163, 10208, 10217, 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10631, 11037, 11163 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10166, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10001, 10208 10009, 10037, 10109, 10163, 10195, 10217, 10287, 10343, 10346, 10374, 10480, 10512, 10634, 10661, 10714
10054, 10000, 10156, 10093, 10030, 10092, 10109
10047, 11454, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10250, 10051, 10180,
Magnavox
Magnum 10037, 10648, 10714, 10715 Majestic 10017 Mandor 10264 Manesth 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
Master’s 10499 Mastro 10053, 10706, 10698, 10780
Masuda
Matsui
Matsushita 10250, 10051, 10650 Maxdorf 10773 Maxent 11755, 11756 Maxim 11556, 11982 MCE 10009 Meck 10698 Mediator 10037, 10556
Medion
Megapower 10700 Megas 10610 Megatron 10047, 10178, 10145, 10009 MEI 11037 Meile 10264, 10817
Memorex
Memphis 10009 Mercury 10060, 10001, 10009, 10037 Mermaid 10037 Metronic 10625
Metz
MGA
MGN Technology 10178 Micro Genius 10150
Micromaxx
Microstar 10808 MicroTEK 10820, 10860 Midland 10047, 10017, 10051 Mikomi 11037, 11149
10060, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10706, 11944, 11904, 11755, 11254, 10802, 10780, 10011, 10035, 10037, 10036
10037, 10668, 10778, 10876, 11037, 11267 11454, 10054, 10030, 10037, 10556, 10704, 10855 10009, 10037, 10217, 10374, 10714, 10715
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371 11037, 10744, 10714, 10556, 10487, 10455, 10443, 10433, 10371, 10352, 10335, 10217, 10208, 10195, 10163, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009
10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, 10698, 10714, 10808, 10880, 11037, 11137, 11248, 11900
10154, 10250, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10009, 10035, 10037, 10195, 10877, 11037, 11911
10037, 10195, 10367, 10388, 10447, 10587, 10668, 10746, 11163 10150, 10178, 10030, 10218, 10374
10037, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037
Minato 10037, 10556 Minerva 10070, 10108, 10195, 10487 Minoka 10037 Mirror 11900
Mitsubishi
Mivar 10217 Monaco 10009 Monivision 10700, 10843 Morgan’s 10037 Motorola 10054, 10051, 10093, 10150
MTC
MTlogic 10714
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Murphy 10163 Musikland 10218 Mx Onda 11498 Myryad 10556
NAD
N
Naiko 10037, 10606, 11982 Nakimura 10037, 10374 Nanbao 10009, 10264 Nansheng 10264, 10817 Narita 11982 NAT 10226 National 10051, 10208, 10226, 10508
NEC
Neckermann
NEI 10037, 10163, 10371 Neovia 10865, 10876, 11371 Netsat 10037 NetTV 11755
Neufunk
New Tech
New World 10218 Newave 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009
Nikkai
Nikkei 10714 Nikko 10178, 10030, 10092 Nikkodo 10178, 10030, 10092
10154, 10250, 10093, 10236, 10180, 11250, 10150, 10178, 10030, 11917, 11037, 10836, 10817, 10556, 10512, 10195, 10108, 10037, 10036, 10011
10180, 10060, 10030, 10092, 10011, 10370, 10512
10051, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817 10037, 10486, 10668, 11037, 11556 10180, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486
10156, 10178, 10166, 10037, 10361, 10866, 11156
10047, 10154, 10156, 10051, 10053, 10178, 10030, 11704, 11270, 11170, 10817, 10704, 10661, 10653, 10508, 10499, 10455, 10374, 10264, 10217, 10170, 10036, 10011, 10009 10037, 10200, 10327, 10370, 10418, 10556
10009, 10037, 10218, 10556, 10610, 10714 10009, 10037, 10217, 10343, 10556
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10264
Nishi 10030 Nobliko 10070 Nogamatic 10109
Nokia
Norcent 10748, 10824 Nordic 10217
Nordmende
Normerel 10037 Novatronic 10037, 10374 NTC 10092 Nu-Tec 10455, 10698, 10820 Nyon 10000 Oceanic 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548
O
Odeon 10264 Okano 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370 Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610 Omega 10264 Omni 10748, 10698, 10780, 10872 Onida 10053, 11253 Onimax 10714
Onwa
Opera 10037
Optimus
Optoma 10887 Optonica 10093 Orbit 10037 Orcom 11504
Orion
Orline 10037, 10218 Ormond 10668, 11037
Osaki
Osio 10037 Oso 10218 Osume 10036, 10037, 10218 Otic 11498
Otto Versand
Pace 10092
P
Pacific
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Panashiba 10001
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10374, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610, 10631
10037, 10109, 10195, 10287, 10343, 10560, 10714
10180, 10218, 10371, 10433, 10602
10154, 10250, 10093, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10166, 10650
10017, 10236, 10463, 10180, 10178, 11463, 10011, 10037, 10264, 10443, 10556, 10714, 10880, 11196, 11911
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10556
10093, 10036, 10037, 10109, 10195, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10361, 10512, 10556
10037, 10443, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137 10037, 10163, 10200, 10217, 10327, 10370, 10418, 10556, 10714, 11137 10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10418, 10698, 10773, 10778, 11196, 11269, 11904
PRESET CODE
Page 97
10054, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10051, 10236, 10030, 11947,
Panasonic
Panavision 10037
Panda
Pathe Cinema 10163 Pathe Marconi 10109 Pausa 10009 Paxonic 10060, 10030
PCE 10156, 10060
Penney
Perdio 10037, 10163 Perfekt 10037 Petters 11523
Philco
Philharmonic 10217
Philips
Phocus 10714 Phoenix 10037, 10163, 10370, 10486 Phonola 10037, 10556
Pilot
Pioneer
Pionier 10370, 10486, 11556 Plantron 10009, 10037, 10264 Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10714, 10715
Polaroid
Poppy 10009 Portland 10451, 10092, 10374 Powerpoint 10037, 10487, 10698 Prandoni-Prince 10361 Precision 10236, 10180, 10217 Premier 10009, 10264 President 10860
Prima
Princeton 10700 Prinston 11037 Prinz 10361 Prism 10250, 10051
11946, 11941, 11480, 11310, 11291, 11271, 10853, 10650, 10548, 10508, 10367, 10361, 10226, 10208, 10163, 10108, 10037, 10035
10051, 10706, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10508, 10698, 10780, 10817, 10821
10047, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10108, 11347
10054, 10451, 10463, 10180, 10178, 10030, 10145, 11661, 10037, 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
11454, 10054, 10017, 10000, 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 11961, 11756, 11254, 10690, 10556, 10512, 10374, 10361, 10343, 10200, 10108, 10037, 10009
10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10706, 10011 10166, 10011, 10037, 10109, 10163, 10170, 10287, 10361, 10370, 10486, 10512, 10679, 10760, 10866, 11260
10765, 10865, 11276, 11316, 11341, 11498, 11523
10761, 10009, 10264, 10783, 10815, 10817, 11269, 11933
Profex 10009, 10163, 10361 Profi 10009 Profilo 11556 Profitronic 10037
Proline
Proscan 11447, 10047, 11347, 11922 Prosco 10156
Prosonic
Protec 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
Protech
Proton 10178, 10030, 10001, 10009
Proview 11498
ProVision 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037 Pulsar 10017, 10092 Pulser 10178, 10092 Pvision 10876, 11191 Pye 10037, 10374, 10556 Pymi 10009
Qingdao
Q
Quadral 10051, 10218 Quartz 10150, 10178
Quasar
Quelle
Questa 10036 Questar 10036 R-Line 10037
R
Rabbit 10047 Radialva 10163, 10218 Radiola 10037, 10217, 10556 Radiomarelli 10037
RadioShack
Radiotone
Rank 10070 Rank Arena 10036, 10602 RBM 10070
RCA
Realistic
Recor 10037, 10418 Rectiligne 10037
Rediffusion
Redstar 10037 Reflex 10037, 10668, 11037
Relisys
10037, 10073, 10625, 10634, 11037
10037, 10217, 10370, 10371, 10374, 10668, 10714
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10418, 10486, 10668, 11037
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817
10250, 10051, 10009, 10035, 10650, 10865 10011, 10037, 10070, 10074, 10109, 10195, 10200, 10327, 10361, 10512, 10668, 11037
10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030, 10037, 11904 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, 10418, 10648, 10668, 11037
11447, 10047, 11454, 10054, 10000, 10051, 10093, 10178, 10030, 10092, 11958, 11953, 11948, 11922, 11917, 11547, 11347, 11247, 11147, 11047, 10679, 10625, 10560, 10090 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10030
10036, 10163, 10346, 10361, 10548
10865, 10876, 10877, 11207, 11298
Remotec
Reoc 10714 Revox 10037 Rex 10163, 10264 RFT 10037, 10264 Rinex 10773
Roadstar
Rolson 11371 Rover 10036, 10877
Rowa
Royal Lux 10335, 10370 Runco 10017, 10060, 10030 Ruyi 10817
Saba
S
Sagem 10455, 10610, 10618 Saige 10009, 10817
Saisho
Saivod
Sakai 10163 Sakyno 10455
Salora
Salsa 10335
Sampo
Samsung
Sandra 10217 Sanjian 10264 Sanky 10060, 10030
Sansui
Santon 10009
Sanyo
Sanyong 10037 Sanyuan 10093, 10009, 10817 Saville 10060
10250, 10093, 10145, 10171, 10037
10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10418, 10668, 10714, 11037, 11900
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10817
10250, 10109, 10163, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10361, 10498, 10548, 10560, 10625, 10714
10009, 10011, 10163, 10217, 10264 10037, 10668, 10712, 11037, 11163, 11556, 11982
10163, 10208, 10361, 10480, 10548, 10631
10047, 10154, 10093, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10650, 10700, 11755, 11756 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10156, 10093, 10060, 10812, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10814, 10766, 10718, 10618, 10587, 10817, 10821, 11060, 11249, 11312, 11903, 11959, 10556, 10371, 10370, 10362, 10264, 10226, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10090, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10009
10463, 10060, 10030, 10706, 10037, 10371, 10455, 10602, 10714, 10861, 11371, 11537, 11904, 11911
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10463, 10180, 10145, 10171, 11755, 11208, 10704, 10508, 10370, 10264, 10217, 10208, 10170, 10163, 10108, 10088, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009
SBR 10037, 10556 Sceptre 11217
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scotch 10178 Scotland 10163 Scott 10236, 10180, 10178, 10030
Sears
Seaway 10634 Seelver 11037
SEG
SEI 10037, 10163 Sei-Sinudyne 10037
Seleco
Semivox 10180 Semp 10156 Sencora 10009 Sentra 10035 Serino 10093, 10455, 10610 Shancha 10264, 10817
Shanghai
Shaofeng 10145, 10817
Sharp
Shen Ying 10092, 10009 Shencai 10145, 10009, 10264 Sheng Chia 10093, 10236, 10009 Shenyang 10009, 10264, 10817 Sherwood 10009 Shintoshi 10037
Shivaki
Show 10009, 10418 Siarem 10163
Siemens
Siera 10037, 10556 Siesta 10370 Signature 10047, 10093, 10030 Silva 10037, 10361, 10648 Silva Schneider 10037, 11556 Silvano 10587 Silver 10036, 10361, 10455, 10715 SilverCrest 11037
10361, 10374, 10486, 10548, 10606, 10714, 11191 11982, 11904, 11137, 11037, 10714, 10668, 10648, 10556, 10394, 10371, 10361, 10352, 10343, 10218, 10217, 10163, 10070, 10037
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10166, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10001, 10208, 11904
10009, 10036, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10487, 10668, 11037, 11163
10163, 10264, 10346, 10362, 10371
10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817
10054, 10093, 10180, 10053, 10030, 10009, 10036, 10200, 10650, 10653, 10668, 11193, 11393, 11917
10178, 10037, 10374, 10443, 10556
10145, 10037, 10195, 10200, 10327
Simpson 10178, 10030, 10011
Singer
Sinotec 10773 Sinudyne 10037, 10163, 10361 Skantic 10163 SKY 10037, 10880, 11504 Sky Brazil 10880 Sky-North 10037 Skygiant 10180
Skyworth
Sliding 10865, 10880 SLX 10668 Smaragd 10487 Soemtron 10865, 11298 Solar Drape 10000 Solavox 10037, 10163, 10361, 10548 Sole 10813 Sonawa 10218 Songba 10009 Soniko 10037 Sonitron 10208, 10217, 10370 Sonneclair 10037 Sonoko 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Sonolor 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548 Sontec 10009, 10037, 10370
Sony
Sound & Vision 10218, 10374 Soundesign 10180, 10178 Soundwave 10037, 10418, 10715 Sova 11952
Sowa
Soyea 10773 Spectra 10009 Spectravision 10156, 10178 Spectroniq 11498 Squareview 10171 SR2000 10154, 10171 Ssangyong 10009 SSS 10180 Staksonic 10009
Standard
Standard Components
Starlite
Stenway 10218 Stern 10163, 10264 Stevison 11982 Strato 10009, 10037, 10264
10060, 10092, 10009, 10037, 10335, 10371, 10433, 11537
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10698, 10805, 10817, 11115
10017, 10154, 11100, 10000, 10150, 10053, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10074, 10353, 10650, 11505, 11651, 11751, 11904
10156, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10092, 10036, 10226
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10374, 11037
10009, 10218 10236, 10180, 10009, 10037,
10163, 10264
PRESET CODE
Page 98
Strong 11149, 11163 Studio Experience 10843 Stylandia 10217
Sunkai
Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371 Sunwatt 10455 Sunwood 10037 Superla 10217 Superscan 10093, 10864, 11944 Supersonic 10009, 10208, 10455, 10805 SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556 Supra 10178, 10009, 10374 Supreme 10000 Susumu 10218, 10287, 10335 Sutron 10009 SV2000 10054
SVA
Svasa 10455 Swisstec 10880, 11504 Sydney 10217
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synco
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331 Sysline 10037 T+A 10447
T
Tacico 10178, 10092, 10009 Tai Yi 10009 Taishan 10009, 10374, 10817 Tandberg 10109, 10361, 10367 Tandy 10093, 10163, 10217, 10218 Targa 11371
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL 10706, 10698, 11027, 11537 TCM 10714, 10808
Teac
Tec
Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11163 Techica 10218 Technica 11982
10218, 10455, 10487, 10610, 10865
10748, 10587, 10865, 10870, 10871, 10872
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10036, 10037, 10876, 11271, 11904, 11944 10000, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11904, 11944 10000, 10451, 10093, 10060, 10178, 10092, 10036
10092, 10036, 10163, 10170, 10217, 10650 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10060, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009, 10217, 11156, 11191, 11248, 11254, 11371, 11556, 11756
10154, 10178, 10171, 10706, 11755, 11149, 11037, 10714, 10712, 10698, 10668, 10512, 10455, 10418, 10264, 10217, 10170, 10037, 10009 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10335
Technics
TechniSat 10556, 11267 Technisson 10714 Technosonic 10499, 10556 Technovox 10030, 10217 Techview 10847 Techwood 10250, 10051, 10060, 11163 Tecnimagen 10556
Teco
Tedelex
Teiron 10009 Tek 10820
Teknika
Tele System Electronic
Teleavia 10287, 10343 Telecolor 10017
Telecor
Telefunken
Telefusion 10037 Telegazi 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264 Telemeister 10037 Telesonic 10037 Telestar 10009, 10037, 10556 Teletech 10009, 10037, 10668, 11037 Teleton 10036, 10217 Televideon 10163 Teleview 10037 Tempest 10009, 10264, 10455 Tennessee 10037
Tensai
Tenson 10009 Tera 10030, 10092
Tevion
Texet 10009, 10217, 10218, 10374 Texla 10780 ThemeScene 10887 Thomas 10047, 10178, 10001, 11904
Thomson
Thorn
Thorn-Ferguson 10073, 10335, 10343, 10499
10054, 10250, 10051, 10226, 10556, 10650
10051, 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009, 10036, 10218, 10264, 10653, 11040 10009, 10208, 10217, 10418, 10606, 10698, 11537
10054, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10060, 10178, 10092
10876
10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10394 10702, 11504, 10821, 10820, 10819, 10714, 10712, 10698, 10625, 10587, 10560, 10498, 10486, 10346, 10343, 10335, 10287, 10109, 10074, 10073, 10037
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10371, 10374, 10715, 11037
10037, 10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037, 11137, 11248, 11298, 11498, 11556
11447, 10047, 10037, 10109, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10560, 10625 10035, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10074, 10109, 10163, 10264, 10335, 10343, 10361, 10499, 10512
Tiane 10093, 10817 Tiny 11269 TMK 10236, 10180, 10178 TML 11756 TNCi 10017 Tobishi 10218 Tobo 10748, 10009, 10264 Tocom 10156
Tokai
Tokaido 11037 Tokyo 10035 Tomashi 10218 Tongguang 10264 Tongtel 10587, 10780 Topline 10668, 11037
Toshiba
Totevision 10051 Towada 10217 Toyoda 10009, 10264, 10371 Toyomenka 10178 Trakton 10217, 10264 Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037 TRANS-continents 10556, 10865
Transonic
Triad 10218, 10556 Trident 10217 Trio 11498 Tristar 10218, 10264 Triumph 10037, 10346, 10556 Truetone 10250, 10051 Tuntex 10030, 10092, 10009 TVS 10463 TVTEXT 95 10556
Uher
U
Ultra 10092 Ultravox 10037, 10163, 10374 Unic Line 10037, 10455
United
Universal 10047, 10037
Universum
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10374, 10668, 11037
10154, 11256, 10156, 10150, 11265, 10060, 11145, 10145, 10166, 11037, 11156, 11163, 11164, 11356, 11508, 11556, 11656, 11704, 11945, 11971, 10845, 10821, 10718, 10650, 10618, 10508, 10264, 10217, 10195, 10109, 10070, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009
10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10455, 10512, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10780
10037, 10370, 10374, 10418, 10480, 10486
10037, 10587, 10714, 10715, 11037, 11982
11163, 11037, 10668, 10631, 10618, 10512, 10480, 10418, 10370, 10362, 10361, 10346, 10327, 10264, 10217, 10200, 10195, 10170, 10109, 10074, 10070, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009
Univox 10037, 10163 V 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756
V
V2max 10865 V7 Videoseven 10880, 11217, 11755 Vector Research 10030
Vestel
Vexa 10009, 10037
Victor
Videocon 10508 Videologic 10218 Videologique 10217, 10218 Videomac 10009 VideoSystem 10037 Videotechnic 10217, 10374 Videoton 10163 Vidikron 10054 Vidtech 10178, 10036 Viewpia 10876
Viewsonic
Viking 10060 Viore 11207 Vision 10037, 10217, 10264
Vizio
Vortec 10037 Voxson 10178, 10037, 10163, 10418
Waltham
W
Wards
Warumaia 10374, 10661
Watson
Watt Radio 10163 Waycon 10156 Wega 10036, 10037 Wegavox 10009 Weipai 10009 Welltech 10714 Weltblick 10217 Welton 10178 Weltstar 11037
Westinghouse
Wharfedale 10037, 10556, 10860, 11556 White
Westinghouse Windsor 10668, 11037
Windy Sam 10556 Wintel 10714 World 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037, 11163
10250, 10053, 10036, 10650, 10653
10857, 10864, 10885, 11330, 11578, 11627, 11755
10864, 10885, 11755, 11756, 11758
10037, 10109, 10217, 10418, 10443, 10668, 11037 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10236, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10166, 11347, 11156, 11147, 10866, 10195, 10001, 10037, 10035
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10394, 10668, 10714, 11037
10000, 10451, 10885, 10889, 11282, 11577
10451, 10236, 10463, 10037, 10623, 10889, 11909
World-of-Vision
Worldview 10455 X-View 11191
X
Xenius 10634, 10661
Xiahua
Xianghai 10009 Xiangyang 10264 Xiangyu 10009 Xihu 10264, 10817 Xingfu 10009 Xinghai 10264 XLogic 10698, 10860 Xoceco 11064 Xoro 11196, 11217 XR-1000 10154, 10180, 10171 Xrypton 10037 Yamaha 10030, 10650, 11576
Y
Yamishi 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455 Yapshe 10250 Yingge 10009 Yokan 10037
Yoko
Yonggu 10009 Yorx 10030, 10218 Youlanasi 10817 Yousida 10009 Yuhang 10009 Zanussi 10163, 10217, 10264
Z
Zenith
ZhuHai 10009, 10374
10865, 10877, 10880, 11217, 11298
10009, 10264, 10698, 10773, 10817
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370
10047, 10017, 10000, 10093, 10463, 11265, 10812, 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, 10171, 10092, 10037, 11904, 11909, 11911
TV/DVD Combination b2, b4
b2
Advent 11933
A
Akai 11675 Akura 11982 Alba 11037 Amstrad 11982 Apex Digital 11943 Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952 Axion 11937, 11958 Black Diamond 11037
B
Bush 10698, 11037, 11900 Centrum 11037
C
Crown 11037 D-Vision 11982
D
Denver 10587
PRESET CODE
Page 99
Elfunk 11037
E
Ferguson 11037
F
Finlux 11556 Goodmans 10587, 11037, 11900
G
Hitachi 11960
H
JDV 11982
J
Jensen 11933 KLH 11962
K
Lenco 10587
L
Logik 11037 Luker 11982 Luxor 11037 Matsui 11037
M
Maxim 11982 Medion 11900 Mirror 11900 Naiko 11982
N
Narita 11982 Panasonic 11941
P
Philips 11454, 10556, 11961 Powerpoint 10698 Prima 11933 RCA 11948, 11958
R
Roadstar 11900 Saivod 11982
S
Samsung 11903 Schneider 11982 SEG 11037 Sova 11952 Stevison 11982 Sylvania 10171 Teac 10698
T
Technica 11982 Telefunken 10698 Thomson 10625 Transonic 10587 United 10587, 11037, 11982
U
Vestel 11037
V
b4
Akai 30695
A
Akura 31367 Alba 30695, 30884 Amstrad 31367 Apex Digital 30830 Black Diamond 30713, 30884
B
Broksonic 30695 Bush 30713, 30884 Centrum 30713
C
Citizen 30695 Crown 30713 D-Vision 31367
D
DMTech 31271 Elfunk 30713, 30884
E
Emerson 30675, 31268 ESA 31268 Ferguson 30695, 30713, 30884
F
Funai 31268 Goodmans 30713
G
Grandin 30713 Grundig 30539, 30695 Hitachi 31247
H
Insignia 31268
I
JDV 31367
J
JNC 31271 Konka 31192
K
Logik 30713, 30884
L
Luker 31367 Luxor 30713 Magnavox 31268
M
Matsui 30713, 30884 Maxim 31367 Naiko 31367
N
Narita 31367 Neovia 31271 Orion 30695
O
Pacific 30695
P
Panasonic 31490 Philips 30539, 30854, 31260 RCA 31022
R
Saivod 31367
S
Samsung 30899 Sansui 30695 Schneider 31367 SEG 30713, 30884 Sliding 31115 Stevison 31367 Sylvania 30630, 30675, 31268 Technica 31367
T
Thomson 30551 Toshiba 30695 United 30713, 30884, 31367
U
Universum 30713 Vestel 30884
V
TV/VCR Combination b2, b3, b4
b2
Aiwa 11904, 11911
A
America Action 10180 Amstrad 10171 Audiovox 10180 Beko 10486
B
Black Diamond 11909
Broksonic 10463, 11911 Bush 11556 Curtis Mathes 10051
C
Daewoo 11909
D
Emerson 10236, 10463, 11909, 11911
E
Ferguson 10073, 10625
F
Fidelity 10171 Funai 11904
GE
G
GoldStar 10037 Goodmans 10374, 11909 Grundig 10037, 10195, 10556 Harley Davidson 11904
H
Hinari 10036 Hitachi 11904 Internal 11909
I
JVC 11923
J
LG 10178
L
Lloyd’s 11904 Magnavox 10054, 11904
M
Memorex 10250 Mitsubishi 10093, 10556, 11917 Orion 10463, 11911
O
Palsonic 11904
P
Panasonic 10250, 10051 Penney 10051 Philips 10037, 10556 Quasar 10250, 10051
Q
Radiola 10556
R
RadioShack 11904
RCA
Saba 10625
S
Samsung 11959 Sansui 10463, 11904, 11911 Schneider 10037, 10556, 11904 Sears 11904 Sharp 10093, 11917 Siemens 10037 Sony 10000, 11505, 11904 Sylvania 10054 Symphonic 11904 Teac 10178, 10171
T
Technics 10556 Thomas 11904 Thomson 10625 Toshiba 11971
White
W
Westinghouse Zenith 11904, 11909, 11911
Z
b3
Aiwa
A
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, 11922
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, 11922
11909
20000, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21137
Akai 20352 Alba 20352 America Action 20278 Amstrad 20000 Audiovox 20278 Beko 20104
B
Bestar 20278 Blue Sky 20278, 20352, 20742 BPL 20046 Broksonic 20002, 20479, 21479 Bush 20352, 20742 Citizen 20278, 21278
C
Curtis Mathes 20035, 21035 Daewoo 20278, 20637, 21278
D
Dantax 20352
Emerson
E
Ferguson 20000, 20278
F
Fidelity 20000 Firstline 20278 Funai 20000
GE
G
GoldStar 20037, 20480, 21237 Goodmans 20278, 20352, 20637 Grandin 20278, 20742 Grundig 20081, 20347, 20352, 20742 Hanimex 20352
H
Harley Davidson 20000 Hinari 20352 Hitachi 20000 Hypson 20037 Internal 20278, 20637
I
JBL 20278
J
JMB 20352 Kambrook 20037
K
Kneissel 20278, 20352 LG 20037, 20480, 21237
L
Lloyd’s 20000 Loewe 20037 Magnasonic 20278, 21278
M
Magnavox 20081, 20000, 21781 Magnin 20240 Matsui 20352, 20742 Medion 20352
Memorex
MGA 20240 Mitsubishi 20048, 20081, 20043, 20807 Optimus 20162, 21162, 21262
O
Orion
Pace 20352
P
Pacific 20742
20002, 20278, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21479
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
20162, 20037, 21162, 21237, 21262
20002, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21479
Palsonic 20000
Panasonic
Penney
Philips 20081 Portland 20637 Quasar 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162
Q
Radiola 20081
R
RadioShack 20000
RCA
Saba 20320
S
Samsung 20240, 20432, 21014 Sansui 20000, 20479, 21479 Sanyo 20240 Saville 20352 Schneider 20081, 20000 Sears 20037, 20000, 21237 SEG 20637 Sharp 20037, 20048, 20807 Shivaki 20037 Siemens 20081 Sinudyne 20352 Sony 20032, 20000, 21232 Supra 20348 Sylvania 20081, 21781 Symphonic 20000 Tatung 20352
T
Teac 20037, 20000, 20637, 20642 Technics 20081 Technosonic 20352 Telefunken 20278 Thomas 20000 Thomson 20278 Toshiba 20352, 20432, 20845, 21145 United 20742
U
White
W
Westinghouse Zenith 20000, 20479, 20637, 21479
Z
20035, 20162, 21035, 21162, 21262 20035, 20037, 20240, 21035, 21237
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
20278, 20637
b4
Thomson 30551
T
TV/VCR/DVD Combination b2, b3, b4
b2
Akai 11903
A
Broksonic 11938
B
Emerson 11944
E
ESA 11944 Magnavox 11944
M
Panasonic 11946, 11947
P
RCA 11953
R
PRESET CODE
0
Page 100
Sharp 11917
S
Sylvania 11944 Symphonic 11944 Toshiba 11945
T
b3
Sharp 20807
S
b4
Akai 30899
A
Emerson 30821
E
ESA 30821 Magnavox 30821
M
Panasonic 31362, 31462
P
RCA 31132
R
Sharp 30630
S
Superscan 30821 Sylvania 30821 Symphonic 30821 Toshiba 31045
T
VCR
A-Mark
A
ABS 21972
Admiral
Adventura 20037, 20240, 20000 Aiko 20278 Aim 20278, 20348, 20642
Aiwa
Akai
Akura 20041
Alba
Alienware 21972 Allegro 20039, 21137 Allorgan 20240 Allstar 20081 America Action 20278 American High 20035, 20081 Amoisonic 20479 Amstrad 20000, 20278
Anam
Anam National 20162, 20226, 21162, 21562 Ansonic 20000 Aristona 20081 ASA 20037, 20081 Asha 20240 Astra 20035, 20240 Asuka 20037, 20081, 20000, 20038
20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, 20046
20060, 20048, 20039, 20047, 20104, 20121, 20209, 20479
20037, 20032, 20000, 20209, 20041, 20348, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21137 20037, 20240, 20041, 20106, 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642
20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348, 20352
20162, 20037, 20240, 20278, 20226, 20480
Audiolab 20081 Audiosonic 20278 Audiovox 20037, 20278, 20038 Avis 20000 AVP 20000, 20352 Awa 20037, 20043, 20278, 20642
Baird
B
Basic Line 20104, 20278, 20046 Beaumark 20240 Beko 20104
Bell & Howell
Bestar 20278 Black Diamond 20642 Black Panther 20278 Blaupunkt 20162, 20081, 20226
Blue Sky
BPL 20046 Brandt 20041, 20320 Brandt Electronique 20041 Brinkmann 20209, 20348
Broksonic
Bush
Calix 20037
C
Candle 20037, 20038 Canon 20035 Capehart 20002 Carena 20081, 20209 Carrefour 20045 Carrera 20240 Carver 20035, 20081 Casio 20000 Cathay 20278 CCE 20278 CGE 20000, 20041 Changhong 20048, 20081 Cimline 20209 Cineral 20278 CineVision 21137
Citizen
Classic 20037 Clatronic 20000, 21593 Colortyme 20060, 20035, 20045, 20278 Colt 20000 Combitech 20352 Condor 20278 Craig 20037, 20047, 20240 Criterion 20000
20000, 20104, 20041, 20278, 20046, 20106
20035, 20048, 20039, 20000, 20104, 20046, 20479
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20480, 20642, 20742, 21137
20184, 20121, 20209, 20002, 20348, 20479, 21479 20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642, 20742
20035, 20037, 20240, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20479, 21278
Crosley 20035, 20081, 20000 Crown 20037, 20278, 20480
Curtis Mathes
Cybernex 20240 CyberPower 21972 Cyrus 20081
Daewoo
D
Dansai 20278 Dantax 20352 Daytron 20037, 20278
De Graaf
Decca
Degraff 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104 Deitron 20278 Dell 21972 Denon 20081, 20042 Derwent 20041 Diamant 20037 Diamond 20348 Digitor 20642 DirecTV 20739 Domland 20209 DSE 20642
Dual
Dumont 20081, 20000, 20104 Durabrand 20039, 20038, 20642 Dynatech 20240, 20000 Elbe 20278, 20038
E
Electrohome
Electrophonic 20037 Elin 20240 Elta 20278 Emerald 20184, 20121 Emerex 20032
Emerson
ESA 21137 ESC 20240, 20278 EuroLine 21593
Ferguson
F
Fidelity 20240, 20000, 20352, 20432
Finlandia
Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104
20060, 20035, 20162, 20240, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20432, 21035
20037, 20045, 20104, 20209, 20278, 20046, 20352, 20637, 20642, 21137, 21278
20048, 20081, 20042, 20104, 20046 20081, 20000, 20067, 20209, 20041, 20352
20081, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20348
20060, 20037, 20240, 20000, 20043, 20209
20035, 20037, 20184, 20039, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20121, 20043, 20209, 20002, 20278, 20348, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21479, 21593
20000, 20041, 20278, 20320, 20348
20037, 20048, 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106, 20226
Firstline
Fisher
Flint 20209, 20348 Fuji 20035, 20033 Fujitsu 20037, 20045, 20000 Fujitsu General 20037 Funai 20037, 20000, 20278, 21593 Galaxi 20000
G
Galaxis 20278 Garrard 20000 Gateway 21972
GE
GEC 20081 Gemini 20060 General 20045 General Technic 20348 Genexxa 20037, 20000, 20104, 20278 Go Video 20240, 20432, 20614, 21137
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX 20037 Gradiente 20000 Graetz 20240, 20104, 20041
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
Haaz 20348
H
Hanimex 20352 Hanseatic 20037, 20081, 20209, 20038 Haojie 20240 Harley Davidson 20000 Harman/Kardon 20081, 20038 Headquarter 20046 Hewlett Packard 21972 HI-Q 20035, 20047, 20000
Hinari
Hisawa 20209, 2035 Hischito 20045
Hitachi
Hoeher 20278, 20642 Hornyphon 20081 Howard Computers 21972 HP 21972
20037, 20045, 20042, 20043, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20480, 21137 20039, 20047, 20000, 20104, 20046
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, 20000, 20226, 20320, 20807, 21035, 21060
20035, 20037, 20039, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20038, 20225, 20226, 20480, 21137, 21237 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20637, 20642, 20742
20035, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20046, 20226 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20742 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347, 20348, 20352, 20742
20240, 20209, 20041, 20278, 20352
20035, 20037, 20081, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20041, 20046, 20089
Hughes Network Systems
Humax 20739 Hush 21972
Hypson
Hytek 20047, 20000 iBUYPOWER 21972
I
Imperial 20000 Ingersol 20240, 20209 Interbuy 20037 Interfunk 20081, 20104 Internal 20278, 20637 International 20037, 20278, 20642
Intervision
Irradio 20037, 20081, 21137
ITT
ITT Nokia 20240, 20104, 20041, 20106 ITV 20037, 20278 Janeil 20240
J
JBL 20278 Jensen 20067, 20041 JMB 20209, 20348, 20352, 20742 Joyce 20000
JVC
Kambrook 20037
K
Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642 KEC 20037, 20278
Kendo
Kenwood 20067, 20041, 20038, 20046 KIC 20000 Kimari 20047
Kneissel
Kodak 20035, 20037 Kolin 20043, 20041 Kolster 20209 KTV 20000 Kuba 20047 Kuba Electronic 20047 Lenco 20278
L
LG
Lifetec 20209, 20348 Linksys 21972 Lloyd’s 20240, 20000, 20038
Loewe
Logik 20240, 20000, 20209, 20106 Lumatron 20278, 21137 Lunatron 21137
20042, 20739
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20352, 20480
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20348
20240, 20104, 20041, 20046, 20106
20184, 20081, 20045, 20067, 20041, 21162
20037, 20209, 20278, 20106, 20315, 20348, 20642
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352
20037, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20209, 20278, 20038, 20225, 20480, 21137, 21237
21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, 21262, 21562
PRESET CODE

Loading...